001-052 alfa 147 gta ing...engines with selespeed transmission:keep the brake pedal fully depressed;...
TRANSCRIPT
1
Dear Client,
Thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
Your Alfa 147 GTA has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of Alfa Romeo.
This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your vehicle.
The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety andrespect for the environment which characterise this Alfa 147 GTA.
The Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.
Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo you are not only acquiring a car, but the tranquillity thatcomes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organisation is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.
What’s more, every single component of the Alfa 147 GTA is fully recyclable. At the end of your car’s useful lifespan, any Alfa Romeodealer would be pleased to make arrangements for your car to be recycled.
Nature benefits in two ways: there’s no pollution from waste disposal and the demand for raw materials is reduced.
Have a good trip.
This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa 147 GTA, so you should only consider the information con-cerning the trim level, engine and version purchased by you.
2
VERY IMPORTANT!
STARTING THE ENGINE
Engines with mechanical transmission: make sure the handbrake is pulled; put the gear lever into neutral; press theclutch pedal down to the floor without touching the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon asthe engine starts.
Engines with Selespeed transmission: keep the brake pedal fully depressed; turn the ignition key to AVV and re-lease it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically (the display shows position N).
FUEL CAPACITY
Ronly use unleaded petrol with no less than 95 R.O.N.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
While working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine needles orany other inflammable materials: risk of fire.
K
�RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The vehicle is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to ensure bet-ter respect for the environment.U
3
ACCESSORY ELECTRICAL DEVICES
If after purchasing the car you wish to install accessories that need an electrical supply (with the risk of gradually drainingthe battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services who will assess the overall electrical absorption and check whether thecar system is able to withstand the load required.
CODE CARD
Keep it in a safe place, not in the car. It is advisable to always keep the electronic code on the CODE card with you in caseemergency starting is necessary.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance makes it possible to preserve vehicle peformance levels and safety, respect for the environment andlow running costs unaltered over the course of time.
THE OWNER HANDBOOK...
…you will find important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and vehicle maintenance overtime. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (protecting the environment) â (vehicle safety).
�
4
Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the vehicle was purchased, the subsidiary company or toour branch offices or any point of the Network.
Warranty Booklet
The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new vehicle and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo and tothe warranty conditions.
Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristicsand low running costs of your vehicle. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.
“Service” guide
This contains Alfa Romeo Authorised Services. The services can be recognised by the presence of the Alfa Romeo badge and logo.
The Alfa Romeo organisation in Italy can be found in the telephone directory under the letter “A” Alfa Romeo.
Not all of the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this booklet are fitted as stan-dard to the vehicle. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo Dealers.
5
THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET
The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjectswhich should, in particular, be closely studied.
This indicates the correct procedures to be followed to prevent the vehicle fromdamaging the environment.
Warning. Partially or fully ignoring these rules may lead to serious injury.
Warning. Partially or fully ignoring theserules may lead to serious damage beingcaused to the vehicle which, in somecircumstances, may cause forfeiture of the warranty cover.
PERSONALSAFETY
PROTECTING THEENVIRONMENT
VEHICLESAFETY
The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the vehicleat the time of going to press.
As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes duringproduction, therefore the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.
For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer’s sales network.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
6
THE ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM
To increase protection against attemptedtheft, the car is fitted with an electronic en-gine lock system (Alfa Romeo CODE) whichis activated automatically when the key isremoved from the ignition. In fact the gripof each key contains an electronic devicewhich modulates the radio frequency signaltransmitted when the engine is started by aspecial aerial incorporated in the ignitionswitch. This modulated signal is the “pass-word” by which the control unit recognisesthe key and only in this condition can theengine be started.
KEYS
Two keys are delivered together with thecar, (A-fig. 2) with metal insert and re-mote control function.
The key remote control operates:
– Centralised door unlocking/locking
– Tailgate opening
– Electronic alarm on/off (if existing)
– Window and sunroof (if existing) un-locking/locking.
GGEETTTTIINNGG TTOO KKNNOOWW YYOOUURR CCAARR
fig. 2
A0A0002m
fig. 1
A0A0411m
SYMBOLS
On some of the components making upyour Alfa 147 GTA, or near to them,special coloured labels have been attached.These labels bear symbols that remind youof the precautions to be taken as regards thatparticular component.A summary list of the symbols (fig. 1) isto be found under the bonnet.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
7
The key metal insert operates:
– The ignition switch
-– the driver's door lock and, optional forversions/markets where applicable, the pas-senger's door lock
– The passenger’s side air-bag deactiva-tion
– The fuel tank plug lock.
IMPORTANT To guarantee the perfectefficiency of the electronic devices containedin keys, avoid letting tem directly exposedto sunrays.
Together with the keys the CODE card isprovided (fig. 3), bearing in print the keycodes (both mechanical and electronic foremergency start up).
The code numbers on the CODE card mustbe kept in a safe place, not in the car.
The driver should always keep the elec-tronic code given on the CODE card withhim/her in the event of having to carry outemergency starting.
WARNING - U.K. VEHICLES ONLY
At the behest of the motor insurance com-panies the CODE card for emergency start-ing and remplacement of keys is not pro-vided. If you need assistance please contactyour nearest Alfa Romeo Dealer or telephonefree phone 0800 717000.
If the car changes owner,the new owner must begiven all the keys and the
CODE card.
KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL
For versions/markets where applicable,the key with remote control (fig. 4) is fit-ted with:
– a metal insert (A) that can be enclosedin the key grip
– a button (B) for remote door unlock-ing and at the same time switching off theelectronic alarm
– a button (C) for remote door lockingand at the same time switching on the elec-tronic alarm
– a button (D) for remote boot unlocking– removable hook ring (E)– a button (F) for power-assisted opening
of the metal insert.
fig. 3
A0A0003m
fig. 4
A0A0705m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
8
To insert the metal insert in the key grip,keep the button (F) pressed and turn theinsert in the direction shown by the arrowuntil hearing the click as it locks into place.Then release the button (F).
To unlock the doors by remote control,press button (B), the doors unlock and thedirection indicators flash twice. To lock thedoors by remote control, press button (C),the doors lock and the direction indicatorsflash once. Pressing button (B) the doorsare released, if within the next 60 secondsa door or the tailgate are not opened, thesystem automatically locks everythingagain.
On cars fitted with electronic alarm system,pressing button (B) turns it off, pressing but-ton (C) turns it on while the transmittersends the code to the receiver. This code(rolling code) varies at each transmission.
IMPORTANT If when pressing button(B, C or D) the control is rejected or is notperformed, the battery should be replacedby a new one of the same type to be foundc/o normal retailers.
OPENING THE TAILGATE
The tailgate can be opened from outsideby remote control pressing button (D), evenif the electronic alarm is on. Opening of thetailgate is accompanied by the direction in-dicators flashing twice; closing is accompa-nied by a single flash.
If the electronic alarm is fitted, when thetailgate is opened the alarm system switch-es off volumetric protection and the tailgatecontrol sensor, the system (with the excep-tion of versions for certain markets) “beeps”twice.
The metal insert (A) of the key operates:– the ignition switch– the driver's door lock and, optional for
versions/markets where applicable, the pas-senger's door lock
– the passenger’s side Air bag deactivat-ing switch
– the fuel cap lock.
When pressing the button(F), take care to prevent
the metal insert from causing harmor damage when it comes out. Thebutton (F) should only be pressedwhen the key is away from thebody, in particular from the eyes,and from objects that can be spoilt(clothes for instance). Make surethe key can never be touched byothers, especially children, whomay inadvertently press the but-ton (F).
WARNING
The codes of any keys notpresented during the mem-orising procedure are
erased. The reason for this is to en-sure that any lost or stolen keyscannot be used to start the engine.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
9
Closing the tailgate again, the control func-tions are restored, the system (with the ex-ception of versions for certain markets)“beeps” twice.
OPERATION
Each time the ignition key is turned to theSTOP position, the Alfa Romeo CODE sys-tem deactivates the functions of the engineelectronic control unit.
Each time the car is started turning the ig-nition key to MAR, the Alfa Romeo CODEcontrol unit sends a recognition code to theengine control unit to deactivate the in-hibitor. The code is crypted and variable be-tween over four billion possible combina-tions, and it is sent only if the system con-trol system has recognised the code trans-mitted from the key which contains an elec-tronic transmitter, through an aerial woundaround the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT Turning on of the AlfaRomeo CODE warning light (Y) when trav-elling with the ignition key at MAR:
1) If the warning light turns on, this meansthat the system is running a self-test (for ex-ample for a voltage drop). At the first stop,it will be possible to test the system: switchoff the engine turning the ignition key toSTOP; then turn the ignition key to MARagain: the warning light turns on and shouldgo off in about one second. If the warninglight stays on repeat the procedure describedpreviously leaving the key at STOP for over30 seconds. Should the inconvenience per-sist, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
If the code has not been recognised cor-rectly, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light(Y) on the cluster turns on.
In this case, the key should be moved tothe STOP position and then back to MAR;if the lock continues, possibly try again withthe other key provided with the car. If it isstill not possible to start the car, follow theinstructions given in the “In an emergency”chapter and then contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorised Services.
IMPORTANT Every key has its owncode, which must be memorised by the sys-tem control unit. To memorise new keys, upto a maximum of eight, apply solely to Al-fa Romeo Authorised Services taking withyou all the keys in your possession,the CODEcard, a personal identity document and thecar’s ownership documents.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
10
2) Should the warning light not be on atthe same time as the display of “IMMOBI-LIZ. NOT PROGRAMMED” on the re-config-urable multifunction display, this means thatthe car is not protected by the engine blockdevice. Contact immediately the Alfa RomeoAuthorized Service to have all the keysstored.
Should the warning lightturn on at the same time asthe display of the message
“IMMOBILIZ. NOT PROGRAMMED”on the re-configurable multifunc-tion display, 2 seconds after the ig-nition key has been set to the po-sition MAR, this means that thekey codes have not been stored,and hence the car is not protectedagainst possible theft by the AlfaRomeo CODE system. In this casecontact the Alfa Romeo AuthorizedService for storing the key codes.
KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
If when pressing button (B, C or D-fig. 4) the control is rejected or is not per-formed, the battery should be replaced bya new one of the same type to be found c/onormal retailers.
Battery replacement:
– press button (A-fig. 5) and move themetal insert (B) to the open position;
– using a finely-tipped screwdriver, turnthe opening device (C) and pull out the bat-tery holder (D);
– replace the battery (E) making sure thatthe bias is correct;
– re-insert the battery holder in the keyand lock it, turning the device (C).
Used batteries are harm-ful to the environment.They should be disposed of
as specified by law in the specialcontainers provided. Avoid expo-sure to naked flames and high tem-peratures. Keep out of reach ofchildren.
fig. 5
A0A0006m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
11
ELECTRONIC ALARM(optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)
DESCRIPTION
The system comprises: a transmitter, re-ceiver, control unit with siren and volumet-ric sensors. The electronic alarm is controlledby the receiver incorporated in the instru-ment cluster and it is turned on and off bythe remote control in the key which sendsthe crypted and variable code. The electronicalarm controls: the unlawful opening ofdoors, bonnet and boot (perimetral protec-tion), operation of the ignition key, batterycable cutting, the presence of moving bod-ies in the passenger compartment (volu-metric protection) any abnormal raising/sloping of the car (for versions/marketswhere applicable) and central door locking.It also makes it possible to cut off the vol-umetric protection.
IMPORTANT The engine inhibitor func-tion is guaranteed by the Alfa Romeo CODEsystem which is activated automaticallywhen the ignition key is removed.
REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL KEYS WITH REMOTE CONTROL
The receiver can recognise up to 5 keyswith incorporated remote control. Should anew key with remote control be necessaryfor any reason during the life of the car, con-tact directly Alfa Romeo Authorised Services,taking with you the CODE card, a personalidentity document and the car’s ownershipdocuments.
HOW TO ACTIVATE THE ALARM
With the doors, bonnet and boot shut andthe ignition key in the STOP or PARK po-sition (key removed), point the key with re-mote control in the direction of the car, thenpress and release the button (C-fig. 6).
With the exception of certain markets, thesystem sounds a “beep” and the doors arelocked.
Engagement of the alarm is preceded bya self-diagnostic test indicated by a differentflashing frequency of the deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dashboard. If a fault is de-tected the system sounds a further warn-ing “beep”.
fig. 6
A0A0010m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
12
Surveillance
After switching on, the flashing of the de-terrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dashboard,indicates the system surveillance mode. Theled flashes throughout this period.
IMPORTANT Operation of the electronicalarm is adapted at the origin to the rulesof the different countries.
Self-diagnostic functions and door, bonnet, boot control
If, after engaging the alarm, a second“beep” is sounded, switch off the systempressing the button (B-fig. 6), check thatthe doors, bonnet and tailgate are properlyshut, then switch the system on again press-ing the button (C).
Otherwise, the door, bonnet or tailgate thatis not shut properly will be excluded fromthe alarm system control.
If the doors, bonnet and boot are shut cor-rectly and the control signal is repeated, thesystem self-diagnostics has detected a sys-tem operating fault. It is therefore necessaryto contact Authorised Alfa Romeo Services.
HOW TO DEACTIVATE THEALARM
To deactivate the alarm press the button (B-fig. 6) of the key with remote control. Thesystem will react as follows (with the ex-ception of certain markets):
– two brief flashes of the direction indi-cators
– two brief “beeps” of the siren
– door unlocking.
IMPORTANT If when the system isturned off the deterrent led (A-fig. 7) onthe dashboard stays on (maximum 2 min-utes or until the ignition key is set to MAR)the following should be borne in mind:
fig. 7
A0A0005m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
13
– if the led continues flashing, but at dif-ferent intervals than normal, this means thatdifferent attempts to break in have occurred.Through the number of flashes it is possi-ble to identify the type of attempt:
1 flash: one or more doors
2 flashes: tailgate
3 flashes: bonnet
4 flashes: ultrasounds
5 flashes: abnormal vehicle lift-ing/sloping (for ver-sions/markets where ap-plicable)
6 flashes: tampering with car startingcables
7 flashes: tampering with battery ca-bles or cutting emergencykey cables
8 flashes: connection line to sensorsand siren
9 flashes: at least three causes ofalarm.
WHEN THE ALARM IS TRIGGERED
When the system is on, the alarm comesinto action in the following cases:
– opening of one of the doors, bonnet ortailgate;
– disconnection of the battery or section-ing of electric cables;
– intrusion in the passenger compartment,for example breakage of windows (volu-metric protection);
– attempt to start the engine (key inMAR position);
– abnormal car lifting/sloping (for ver-sions/markets where applicable).
Depending on the markets, the cutting inof the alarm causes operation of the sirenand hazard warning lights (for about 26 sec-onds). The ways of operating and the num-ber of cycles may vary depending on themarkets.
A maximum number of cycles is howeverenvisaged.
Once the alarm cycle has ended, the sys-tem resumes its normal control function.
VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION
To make sure that the protection systemworks correctly the side windows and sun-roof (if fitted) must be properly shut.
The function can be cut off (if, for exam-ple, leaving animals in the car) carrying outthe following operations in rapid succession:starting from the condition with the igni-tion key at MAR, move the key to STOP,then immediately back to MAR and thento STOP again, then remove the ignitionkey.
The deterrent led (A-fig. 7) on the dash-board lights up for about 2 seconds to con-firm that the function has been cut off.
To restore volumetric protection, move andkeep the ignition key at MAR for over 30seconds.
If, with the volumetric protection functiondeactivated, an electric control controlled bythe ignition key at MAR is required (e.g.power windows) turn the key to MAR, op-erate the control and move the key toSTOP in a maximum time of 30 seconds.This way volumetric protection is not re-stored.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
14
HOW TO CUT OFF THE ALARM SYSTEM
To deactivate the alarm system complete-ly (for instance during prolonged inactivityof the vehicle) simply lock the car turningthe key in the lock.
MINISTERIAL CERTIFICATION
In accordance with the law in force in eachcountry, on the subject of radio frequency,we wish to point out that for the markets inwhich the transmitter needs to be marked,the certification number is given on the com-ponent.
Depending on the versions/markets, thecode may also be given on the transmitterand/or on the receiver.
IGNITION DEVICE
SWITCH (fig. 8)
The key can be turned to one of four po-sitions:
– STOP: engine switched off, key can beremoved, engine inhibitor engaged, steer-ing lock engaged, services excluded apartfrom those supplied directly (e.g. hazardwarning lights).
– MAR: drive position. The engine lockis deactivated and all electrical devices arepowered.
IMPORTANT Do not leave the key inthis position when the engine is stopped.
– AVV: instable position for starting theengine.
IMPORTANT If the engine fails to startmove the key back to STOP and repeat.
The ignition switch has a safety devicewhich prevents passage to AVV when theengine is running.
– PARK: engine switched off, key canbe removed, engine lock engaged, steer-ing lock engaged, sidelights switched on au-tomatically.
IMPORTANT To turn the key to thePARK position, button (A) on the switchmust be pressed first.
fig. 8
A0A0016m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
15
If the ignition device istampered with (for exam-ple an attempted theft)
have it checked over by AlfaRomeo Authorised Services beforetravelling again.
STEERING LOCK
Engaging:
– move the key to STOP or PARK, thenremove the key and turn the steering wheelslightly to facilitate the locking action.
Disengaging:
– turn the key to MAR gently rocking thesteering wheel from side to side.
DOORS
OPENING/CLOSING FROMOUTSIDE
To open the driver's door turn the keyclockwise and to open the passengers' door,optional for versions/markets where ap-plicable, turn the key anti-clockwise, thenremove the key and press the button (A-fig. 9).
To close the door, turn the key in the lockin the opposite direction to the one for open-ing.
fig. 9
A0A0017m
Before opening a door, al-ways make sure that it can
be done safely.
WARNING
Never remove the ignitionkey with the car on the
move. The steering wheel wouldlock automatically the first time thesteering wheel is turned. This al-so occurs if the car is towed.
WARNING
When leaving the vehiclealways remove the key
from the ignition to prevent any oc-cupants of the vehicle from acci-dentally activating the controls.Never leave children in the vehi-cle unaccompanied. Remember toengage the handbrake, and, if thevehicle is parked on an uphill slope,to engage first gear. If the vehicleis facing downhill, engage reversegear.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out whatever after-
market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifi-cations (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device) that could badly affectperformance and safety, cause thelapse of warranty and also result innon-compliance of the car with ho-mologation requirements.
WARNING
FRONT SEATSCENTRAL LOCKING
This allows central locking of the doorlocks.
To engage central locking, the doors mustbe perfectly shut, otherwise, locking is de-nied.
IMPORTANT With central locking en-gaged, pulling the inside lever for openingone of the doors causes the unlocking alsoof the other door.
In the event of a power cut off (blownfuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is still pos-sible to work the lock by hand.
fig. 11
A0A0019m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
16
OPENING/CLOSINGFROM INSIDE
To open the door, pull the handle(A-fig. 10).
To close the door, pull it; then to preventopening from outside, press the button (A-fig. 11) on the dashboard, the deterrentled (B) on the actual button lights up witha yellow light to confirm that locking hastaken place.
fig. 12
A0A0409m
Any adjustments are to becarried out only with the
vehicle stationary.
WARNING
fig. 10
A0A0018m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
17
LENGTHWISE ADJUSTMENT(fig. 12)
Raise the lever (A) and push the seatbackwards or forwards; in the driving posi-tion the arms should be slightly flexed andthe hands should rest on the rim of the steer-ing wheel.
DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)
To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) up-wards, then work the lever (up and down)until reaching the required height, then re-lease it. To lower the seat, push the lever(B) downwards then work the lever (up anddown) until reaching the required height.
IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-ried out only seated in the driver’s seat.
BACK REST ANGLEADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)
Turn the knob (C) until reaching the posi-tion required.
TILTING THE BACK REST (fig. 12)
To gain access to the rear seats, pull thehandle (E), the back rest folds and the seatis free to run forwards.
A recovery mechanism with memorymakes it possible to take the seat back toits previous position.
Once the seat back has been returned tothe travelling condition, make sure that itis correctly clamped, checking that the “redband” on the upper part of the handle (E)is concealed. In fact, this “red band” indi-cates that the seat back is not camped.
Also check that the seat is firmly locked onthe runners, trying to move it to and from.
DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBARADJUSTMENT (fig. 12)
Turn the knob (D) until obtaining the mostcomfortable position.
After releasing the adjust-ment lever, always check
that the seat is locked on the run-ners, trying to move it to and from.The lack of this clamping actioncould cause the seat to move un-expectedly and cause loss of ve-hicle control.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
18
CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 13)
The armrest is adjustable and can be raisedor lowered to the required position.
To adjust, slightly raise the armrest, thenpress the release device (A).
Inside the armrest there is an oddmentscompartment, to use it, raise the cover,pressing the device (B).
SEAT WARMING (fig. 14)(optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)
The seat warming pad can be switched onand off using switch (A) on the outer sideof the seat.
Switching on is shown by the lighting upof the led (B) on the switch itself.
REAR POCKETS (fig. 15)(for versions/markets where applicable)
The front seats are fitted with a pocket inthe rear of the back rest.
fig. 14
A0A0485m
fig. 15
A0A0413m
fig. 13
A0A0412m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
19
REAR SEATS
EXTENDING THELUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
The split rear seat makes it possible to ex-tend the luggage compartment totally or par-tially, acting separately on one of the twoparts, thereby offering different possibilitiesof load depending on the number of rearpassengers.
Removing the rear parcel shelf
Proceed as follows:
– free the ends of the two rods (A-fig.16) supporting the parcel shelf (B) pullingthe eyelets (C) off the pins (D);
– release the pins (A-fig. 17) at the out-side of the shelf from their housings (B) ob-tained in the side supports, then remove theshelf pulling it outwards.
After removal the shelf can be placed intwo ways:
– crossways in the luggage compartmentas shown in fig. 18;
– crossways between the front seat backreats and the tilted cushions of the rear seatsif the boot is extended totally (see fig. 22).
Total extension
Proceed as follows:
– position the seat belt buckles (A-fig.19) in their housings in the cushion;
– pull the handles in the centre of the cush-ions, then tilt them forwards;
fig. 16
A0A0414m
fig. 17
A0A0028m
fig. 19
A0A0416m
fig. 18
A0A0415m
If a particularly heavy loadis placed in the boot, when
travelling at night, it is wise tocheck the height of the high beams(see “Headlamps” paragraph).
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
20
To bring the seat back to itsnormal position
Proceed as follows:
– move the seat belts to the side extend-ing them correctly without twisting;
– raise the seat backs, pushing them back-wards until hearing both clamping devicesclick into place, checking that the “redband” can no longer be seen on the upperpart of the levers (A-fig. 21). In fact, this“red band” indicates that the seat back isnot clamped;
– set the cushions to the horizontal posi-tion keeping the centre seat belt raised;
– refit the headrests.
– raise the headrests to the highest posi-tion, press both buttons (A-fig. 20) at theside of the two supports, then remove theheadrests pulling them upwards.
– move the seat belts to the side extend-ing them correctly without twisting;
– raise the levers (A-fig. 21) retainingthe back rests and tilt them forwards to ob-tain a single loading surface (fig. 22).
IMPORTANT For versions/marketswhere applicable, the retainer levers are re-placed by buttons (one for each side). To re-lease the back rests and tilt them, use thebuttons themselves.
Partial extension
For partial extension, proceed as follows:
– tilt the cushion required pulling the han-dle at the centre of the cushion, then tilt-ing the actual cushion;
– raise the headrests of the seat to be tilt-ed to the highest position, press both but-tons at the side of the two supports and re-move the headrests pulling them upwards;
– move the seat belt to one side extend-ing it correctly without twisting;
– raise the lever retaining the back restand tilt it forwards.
fig. 20
A0A0469m
fig. 22
A0A0470m
fig. 21
A0A0031m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
21
HEADREST ADJUSTMENT (fig. 23)
The car may be fitted with two headrestsfor the side seats and, depending on the trimlevel, it may also have a third headrest inthe centre.
The headrests have 2 positions(up/down) depending on the height of thepassenger.
In the case of need, it is possible to removethe headrests as described previously (see“Luggage compartment extension”).
CENTRAL ARMREST (fig. 24)
To use the armrest (A), lower it as illus-trated.
LUGGAGERETAINER NET
Present only on certain versions, the inte-rior fittings are completed by the luggage re-tainer net, which is helpful in correctly ar-ranging the load and/or suitable for trans-porting light materials.
Fig. 25, 26, 27 below show the variousclamping solutions for the net in the boot.
fig. 23
A0A0417m
fig. 24
A0A0418m
fig. 25
A0A0326m
Remember that headrestsshould be adjusted so that
the nape, and not the neck, restson them. Only in this position dothey exert their protective actionin the event of a crash from behind.
WARNING
fig. 26
A0A0327m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
22
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS
The driver can adjust the steering wheelposition in rake and height.
To do this, release the lever (A-fig. 28)pulling it towards the steering wheel.
After moving the steering wheel to themost suitable position, lock it pushing thelever fully forwards.
REAR-VIEW MIRRORADJUSTMENT
INNER
The mirror, fitted with a safety device thatcauses it to be released in the event of aviolent crash, can be moved using the lever(A-fig. 29) to two different positions nor-mal or antiglare.
fig. 27
A0A0328m
fig. 28
A0A0038m
fig. 29
A0A0039m
Any adjustment of thesteering wheel position
must be carried out only with thevehicle stationary.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out whatever after-
market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifi-cations (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device) that could badly affectperformance and safety, cause thelapse of warranty and also result innon-compliance of the car with ho-mologation requirements.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
23
Folding (fig. 31)
– In the event of need (for example whenthe mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)it is possible to fold the mirror moving it fromposition (A) to position (B).
Defrosting/demisting (fig. 32)
The electric mirrors are fitted with heat-ing coils which come into operation withrearscreen heating pressing the button (A)thereby defrosting and/or demisting the mir-rors.
IMPORTANT The function is timed andautomatically switched off after a few min-utes.
fig. 31
A0A0041m
fig. 32
A0A0486m
OUTER
Electric adjustment (fig. 30)
– use the switch (A) to select the mirrorrequired (right or left);
– pressing the button (B), in one of thefour directions, move the mirror selected pre-viously;
– Position the switch (A) in the interme-diate locking position.
IMPORTANT Adjustment is possible on-ly with the ignition key at MAR.
fig. 30
A0A0040m
When driving the mirrorsshould always be in posi-
tion (A).
WARNING
As the driver’s wing mirroris curved, it may slightly
alter the perception of distance.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
24
POWER WINDOWS
The power windows are fitted with a safe-ty system with crush-prevention seals. Theelectronic control unit that operates the sys-tem is capable of detecting the presence ofan obstacle during the window closing mo-tion through the special seals. Should thisoccur, the system stops the movement ofthe window and reverses it immediately.
IMPORTANT If the crush-preventionfunction is operated for 3 times in 1 minute,the system automatically sets to the recov-ery mode (self-protection). To reset the cor-rect system operating logic, use the controlbutton. The window will rise in predefinedsteps until closing completely. The logic isreset and if there are no faults, the windowwinder automatically resumes normal op-eration; if not, contact Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services.
IMPORTANT With the ignition key atSTOP or removed, the power windows re-main activated for about 3 minutes and aredeactivated immediately the moment a dooris opened.
fig. 33
A0A0043m
fig. 34
A0A0044m
Passenger’s side (fig. 34)
The button (A) controls the passenger’sside window.
IMPORTANT The passenger side pow-er window is provided with an “automaticcontinuous operation” device both to low-er and to raise the window. A brief push onthe upper or lower part of the button is suf-ficient to start the run which continues au-tomatically: the window stops at the re-quired position by pushing once again in-differently the upper or lower part of the but-ton.
Driver’s side (fig. 33)
The driver’s door panel contains the but-tons that control the following windows,with the ignition key at MAR:
A - left front window
B - right front window.
Press the button to lower the window. Pullto raise it.
IMPORTANT The driver’s power windowis fitted with the “continuous automatic op-eration” device for both lowering and raisingthe window. A brief press on the upper orlower part of the button will cause it to moveand continue automatically: the windowstops in the required position by pressing ei-ther the upper or lower part of the buttonagain.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
25
Do not keep the buttonpressed when the windowis completely raised or
lowered.
IMPORTANT After locking the doors,keeping the corresponding button of the re-mote control pressed for about 2 secondscauses automatic closing of the windowsand sunroof (if present). The remote controlbutton should be pressed until the windowshave completed their stroke; releasing thebutton sooner, the windows stop in the po-sition they are in at that moment.
On all versions, after unlocking the doors,keeping the remote control button pressedfor about 2 seconds the windows and sun-roof (if present) are opened.
SEAT BELTS
USING THE SEAT BELTS
The belt should be worn keeping the cheststraight and rested against the seat back.
Take hold the tongue (A-fig. 35) and in-sert it into the buckle (B), until hearing thelocking click.
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again withoutjerking.
fig. 35
A0A0045m
Improper use of powerwindows can be danger-
ous. Before and during use, alwaysmake sure that the passengers arenot exposed to the risk of harm ei-ther directly by the moving win-dows or by personal objects drawnor knocked by them. When leavingthe car, always remove the ignitionkey to prevent the power windowsfrom being operated inadvertent-ly, and harming anyone left onboard.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
26
The rear seat is fitted with inertial seat beltswith three anchor points with reel for theside seats and for the centre seat (fig. 36).
Through the reel, the belt automaticallyadapts to the body of the passenger wear-ing it, allowing freedom of movement.
When the car is parked on a steep slopethe reel mechanism may block; this is nor-mal. The reel mechanism prevents the web-bing coming out when it is jerked or if thecar brakes sharply, in a collision or when cor-nering at high speed.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button(C). Guide the seat belt with your hand whileit is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting.
fig. 36
A0A0386m
Never press button (C)when travelling.
WARNING
fig. 36a
A0A0708m
When the seat back is cou-pled properly, the “red
band” (B) next to the seat backlevers (A) disappears. The “redband” actually indicates improperseat back coupling (fig. 36a). Whenresetting it in proper position,make sure to hear the locking click.
WARNING
After tilting, when reset-ting the rear seat in
straight position, take care to repo-sition the seat belt properly tohave it ready for use.
WARNING
Make sure the seat back iscorrectly hooked on both
sides (not visible “red bands” (B))to prevent seat back being thrownforwards and injuring passengersshould you brake sharply.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
27
FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT
The front seat belt ring can take differentpositions which make it possible to adjustthe height of the belts.
Always adjust the height of the belts adapt-ing it to the person who is wearing it. Thisprecaution improves their effectiveness. sub-stantially reducing the risk of injury in theevent of a crash.
Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes half way between the end of theshoulder and the neck.
To adjust, lower or raise the grip (A-fig. 38) of the locking device, at the sametime moving the ring (B) to the most ap-propriate of the allowed positions.
LOAD LIMITERS
To increase passive safety, the front seatbelt reels contain a load limiter which allowscontrolled sag in such a way as to dose theforce acting on the shoulders during the beltrestraining action.
fig. 47
A0A0419m
When the rear seats are not occupied, usethe spaces provided in the cushion to stowthe belt buckles.
fig. 37
A0A0387m
To offer the highest level ofprotection, the rear seat
belts should be fastened as shownin fig. 36.
WARNING
Remember that, in theevent of an accident, any
passengers occupying the rearseats who are not wearing a seatbelt not only subject themselves togreat personal risk but constitutea danger to the occupants of thefront seats.
WARNING
After adjustment, alwayscheck that the slider (B-
fig. 38) is anchored in one of thepositions provided. To do this, withthe button (A-fig. 38) released, ex-ert a further pressure to allow theanchor device to catch if release didnot take place at one of the pre-set positions.
WARNING
Make the height adjust-ment when the car is sta-
tionary.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
28
PRE-TENSIONING DEVICES
To increase the efficiency of the front seatbelts, Alfa 147 GTA is fitted with pre-tensioning devices.
These devices “feel” that the car is beingsubject to a violent impact by way of a sen-sor rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.In this way they ensure that the seat beltadheres to the wearer before the restrainingaction begins.
The seat belt locks to indicate that the de-vice has intervened; the seat belt cannot bedrawn back up even when guiding it man-ually.
IMPORTANT The pretensioner will givemaximum protection when the seat belt ad-heres snugly to wearer’s chest and hips.
Front seat pretensioners activate only iffront seat belts are properly fitted into buck-les.
A small amount of smoke may be pro-duced. This smoke is in no way toxic andpresents no fire hazard.
The emergency tensioning retractor needsno maintenance or lubrication. Any modifi-cation to its original features will nullify theretractor’s effectiveness. If, due to unusualnatural events (floods, high waves, etc.),the device has been affected by water andmud, it must be replaced.
Operations involvingbanging, vibrations orheating (above 100°C for
a maximum of 6 hours) in the areaof the pretensioners may damageor trigger off the device. Vibrationsfrom rough road surfaces or acci-dental jolting caused by mountingpavements etc. do not have any ef-fect on the pretensioner. If, how-ever, you need assistance, go to Al-fa Romeo Authorized Services.
The pretensioner can onlybe used once. After a col-
lision that has triggered it, have itreplaced at Alfa Romeo AuthorizedService. The validity of the deviceis written on the plate located onthe front left door near the lock.Contact Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices to have pretensioner re-placed as this date approaches.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
29
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE USE OF THE SEAT BELTS
All the occupants of the car are obliged torespect the local traffic laws regarding thewearing of seat belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before start-ing.
fig. 39
A0A0420m
Never disassemble or tam-per with the pretensioner
components. All interventions mustbe carried out by qualified and au-thorised personnel. Always contactAlfa Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNINGTo ensure the highest de-gree of protection, you are
recommended to keep the seatbackrest in the straightest positionpossible, and the belt adhering wellto the chest and pelvis. Seat beltshould always be worn in both thefront and rear positions! Travellingwithout seat belt increases the riskof serious injury or death in thecase of accident.
WARNING
The seat belt must not betwisted and should cling
tightly to the body. The upper partmust pass over the shoulder anddiagonally across the chest. Thelower part must rest across thepelvis and not across the stomachto eliminate the risk of sliding for-wards (fig. 39). Do not use devices(clips, stoppers, etc.) which keepthe belts away from the body.
WARNING
Under no circumstancesshould the components of
the seat belts and pretensioner betampered with or removed. Anyoperation should be carried out byqualified and authorised personnel.Always contact an Alfa Romeo Au-thorized Service.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
30
Seat belts are also to be worn by expec-tant mothers: the risk of injury in the caseof accident is greatly reduced for them andthe unborn child if they are wearing a seatbelt.
Pregnant women must of course positionthe lower part of the belt very low down sothat it passes under the abdomen (fig. 41).
HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT BELTSALWAYS IN EFFICIENTCONDITIONS
– Always use the belts with the tape welltaut and never twisted; make sure that itis free to run without impediments.
– After a serious accident, replace the beltbeing worn at that time, even if it does notappear damaged. Always replace the seatbelts if pretensioners have been activated.
– To clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in theshade. Never use strong detergents, bleachor dyes or any other chemical substance thatmight weaken the fibres.
– Prevent the reels from getting wet: cor-rect operation of them is only guaranteedif water does not get inside.
– Replace the seat belt if it shows signif-icant wear or cut signs.
fig. 40
A0A0421m
fig. 41
A0A0422m
Do not carry children onyour knee using a single
seat belt for both (fig. 40). Do notfasten other objects to the body.
WARNING
If the seat belt has beensubjected to shock, for ex-
ample during an accident, it mustbe completely replaced togetherwith the attachments and theirscrews, and the pretensioning de-vices, even if visible defects are notdetected as the belt may have lostits resilience.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
31
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY For the best level of protection in the eventof a crash, all occupants must travel seatedand secured by suitable restraint systems.
This is even more important for children.
According to 2003/20/EC Directive, thisprescription is compulsory for all EuropeanCommunity countries.
Compared with adults, a child’s head is pro-portionately larger and heavier than the restof the body, while muscles and bone struc-ture are not completely developed. There-fore, in order to restraint them correctly inthe event of a crash, different systems areneeded then adult seat belts.
fig. 42
A0A0388m
SERIOUS DANGER! Never place cradle child’s seats on thefront passenger seats of cars equipped with passenger air
bag since the air bag activation could cause serious injuries, even mortal.You are advised to carry children always on the rear seat, as this is themost protected position in the case of a crash. In any case, child’s seatsmust absolutely not be positioned on the front seat of car’s with passen-ger’s air bag, which during inflation could cause serious injury, even mor-tal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. Childrenmay placed on the front seat of cars fitted with passenger’s air bag deac-tivation. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to check the warning lightF on dial to make sure that deactivation has actually took place (see para-graph “Front and side air bags“ at item “Front passenger air bag“). Thefront passenger seat shall be adjusted in the most backward position toprevent any contact between the child’s seat and the dashboard.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
32
GROUP 1
Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, chil-dren may be carried facing forwards withseats fitted with front cushion (fig. 44),through which the car seat belt restrains bothchild and seat.
The results of research on the best pro-tection for a child are summarised in Euro-pean Standard ECE-R44, which in additionto making them compulsory, subdivides re-straint systems into five groups:
Group 0 until 10 kg in weight
Group 0+ until 13 kg in weight
Group 1 9-18 kg in weight
Group 2 15-25 kg in weight
Group 3 22-36 kg in weight
As it may be noted, the groups partiallyoverlap and in fact, in commerce it is pos-sible to find devices that cover more thanone weight group (fig. 42).
All the restraint devices must bear the ho-mologation data, together with the controlbrand, on a solidly fixed label which mustabsolutely not be removed.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children are con-sidered as adults and wear belts normally.
The Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includesseats for each weight group, which are therecommended choice because they havebeen designed and specifically experiment-ed for Alfa Romeo cars.
GROUP 0 and 0+
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried fac-ing behind (fig. 43) on a cradle seat,which, supporting the head, does not inducestrain on the neck in the event of sharp de-celeration.
The cradle is restrained by the car safetybelts, as illustrated, and it should in turnrestrain the child with the belts incorporat-ed on it.
fig. 43
A0A0389m
fig. 44
A0A0390m
The illustration is indica-tive only for assembly. As-
semble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions providedwith it.
WARNINGThe illustration is indica-tive only for assembly. As-
semble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions providedwith it.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
33
GROUP 2
Starting from 15 to 25 kg in weight, chil-dren may be restrained directly by the carseat belts. Child seats only have the func-tion of positioning the child correctly in re-lation to the belts, so that the diagonal partadheres to the chest and never to the neckand that the horizontal part adheres to thechild’s pelvis and not to the abdomen (fig.45).
GROUP 3
For children from 22 kg up to 36 kg thechild’s chest is thick enough not to need thespacer back rest any more.
fig. 46 shows proper child seat posi-tioning on the rear seat.
Over 1.50 m in height, children may wearseat belts like adults.
fig. 45
A0A0391m
fig. 46
A0A0392m
The illustration is indica-tive only for assembly. As-
semble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions providedwith it.
WARNINGThe illustration is indica-tive only for assembly. As-
semble the seat according to thecompulsory instructions providedwith it.
WARNING
Seats exist which are suit-able for covering weight
groups 0 and 1 with a rear connec-tion to the car belts and its ownbelts to restrain the child. Becauseof their mass, they can be danger-ous if installed incorrectly fastenedto the car belts with a cushion.Strictly adhere to the assembly in-structions provided.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
34
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE
Alfa 147 GTA complies with the new EC Directive 2000/3 regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats according tothe following table:
Versions rear seats
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
L
L
L
L
0 - 13 kg
9 -18 kg
15 - 25 kg
22 - 36 kg
Group Range of weight SEAT
Front passenger Rear side Rear centrepassenger seat passenger seat
(inertial seat belt withthree anchor points)
Group 0,0+
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal“ category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups“
L = suitable for certain child’s restraint systems available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo for the specified group
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
35
fig. 47
A0A0487m
fig. 48
A0A0488m
Below is a summary of the safe-ty rules to be observed when car-rying children:
1) The recommended position for in-stalling a child’s seat is on the rear seat, asit is the most protected in the event of acrash.
2) If the passenger’s Air bag is deactivat-ed always, check the warning light Fon the cluster to make sure that it has ac-tually been deactivated.
3) Carefully follow the instructions pro-vided with the child’s seat, which the sup-plier is obliged to attach. Keep them in thecar together with the documents and thisbooklet. Do not use used seats without theinstructions for use.
4) Always pull the tape to check that thebelts are buckled.
5) All restraint systems are strictly for onechild only: never use for two children at thesame time.
6) Always make sure that the belts do notrest on the child’s neck.
7) During the journey, do not allow thechild to stay in abnormal positions or releasethe belts.
8) Do not carry children in your arms, noteven small babies. No-one, however strong,can keep hold of them in a crash.
9) In the case of accidents, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.
FRONT AND SIDE AIR BAGS
The car is fitted with front Air bags for thedriver (fig. 47), for the passenger (fig.48), side bags (fig. 49) and window bags(fig. 50).
If a passenger’s air bag isinstalled, children should
never travel on the front seat.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
36
It is formed of a cushion that inflates in-stantaneously contained in a special recess:
– in the centre of the steering wheel forthe driver;
– in the dashboard and with a bigger cush-ion for the passenger.
The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)has been designed to protect the occupantsin the event of head-on crashes of medium-high severity, by placing the cushion be-tween the occupant and the steering wheelor dashboard.
In the case of a crash, an electronic con-trol unit processes the signals leading froma deceleration sensor and, when necessarytriggers inflation of the cushion.
The cushion inflates instantaneously, set-ting itself between the body of the front oc-cupants and the structures that could causeinjury. The cushion then deflates immedi-ately afterwards.
The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)does not replace but is complementary tothe use of belts, which should always beworn, as specified by law in Europe andmost non-European countries.
In the event of a crash a person that is notwearing the seat belt moves forwards andmay come into contact with the cushionwhile it is still opening. Under these cir-cumstances the protection offered by thecushion is reduced.
Front air bags designeed to protect car’soccupants in front crashes and therefore non-activation in other types of collusions (sidecollisions, rear-end shunts, roll-overs, etc...)is not a system malfunction
In collisions against highly deformable ormobile objects (road signposts, heaps of iceor snow, etc.), rear collisions (hit from be-hind by another vehicle), side collisions,wedging under other vehicles or protectivebarriers (for example under a lorry or guardrail) cutting in of the air bag is not activat-ed as it does not offer any more protectionthan the seat belts therefore activationwould be inappropriate.
Therefore the failure to be triggered doesnot mean that the system is not workingproperly.
FRONT AIR BAGS
Description and operation
The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)is a safety device which comes into actionin the event of a head-on collision.
fig. 49
A0A0423m
fig. 50
A0A0424m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
37
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG
The passenger’s front air bag has been de-signed to improve the protection of a per-son wearing a seat belt.
Its volume at maximum inflation fills mostof the space between the dashboard and thepassenger.
MANUAL DEACTIVATIONOF PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG
Should it be absolutely necessary to car-ry a child on the front seat, the passenger’sfront air bag can be deactivated.
Deactivation/reactivation takes place withignition key at STOP and operating it in thespecial key switch on the right-hand side ofthe dashboard (fig. 51). Access to theswitch is only possible with the door open.
fig. 51
A0A0061m
SERIOUS DANGER:The car is fitted
with front passenger’s air bag.Never place cradle child’s seats onthe front passenger seat of carsequipped with passenger air bagsince the air bag activation couldcause serious injuries, even mor-tal. In the case of need, always de-activate the passenger’s air bagwhen a child’s seat is placed on thefront seat. The front passengerseat shall be adjusted in the mostbackward position to prevent anycontact between child’s seat anddashboard. Even if not ruled bylaw, for better protection of adultsyou are recommended to reacti-vate the air bag immediately assoon as child transport is no longernecessary.
WARNINGPlease don’t apply stickersor other objects to the
steering wheel, to the air-bag cov-er on the passenger's side or on theside roof lining to the upholsteryon the roof side. Don’t place ob-jects on the dashboard passenger’sside (such as mobile phones) be-cause they could tamper with thecorrect opening of the passenger’sair-bag and than cause serious in-juries to the vehicle occupants.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
38
The key-operated switch (fig. 51) hastwo positions:
1) Passenger’s front Air bag activated:(ON position P) warning light on instru-ment cluster off; it is absolutely prohibitedto carry a child on the front seat.
2) Passenger’s front Air bag deactivated:(OFF position F) warning light on in-strument cluster on; it is possible to carry achild protected by special restraint systemson the front seat.
The warning light F on the cluster stayson permanently until the passenger’s Air bagis reactivated.
Deactivation of the passenger’s front Airbag does not inhibit operation of the side Airbag.
When the door is open, the key can beinserted and removed in both positions.
SIDE AIR BAGS (SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)
The side bag and window bag have thetask of increasing protection of the occu-pants in the event of a side crash of medi-um-high severity.
They are formed of an instantaneously-in-flating cushion:
– the side bag is housed in the back restof the front seats; with this solution it is al-ways possible to have the cushion in the op-timum position in relation to the passenger,regardless of the adjustment of the seat;
– the window bags, which are “curtain“cushions, are housed in the side roof liningcovered by a special trim, which makes itpossible to extend the cushion downwards.This solution, designed to protect the head,makes it possible to offer the highest degreeof protection to the front and rear occupantsin the event of side crash, thanks to the widecushion inflation surface.
In the event of a side crash, an electroniccontrol unit processes the signals leadingfrom a deceleration sensor and activates,when necessary, inflation of the bags.
The bags inflate instantaneously, settingthemselves between the body of the frontpassengers and the car door. The bags de-flate immediately afterwards.
In the event of minor side crashes (forwhich the restraining action of the seat beltsis sufficient), the air bags are not deployed.Also in this case it is of vital importance towear the seat belts since in case of sidecrash they guarantee proper positioning ofthe occupant and prevent the occupant tobe pitched out of the car in case of violentcrashes.
Therefore the side air bags do not replacebut are complementary to the use of belts,which you are recommended to alwayswear, as specified by law in Europe and mostnon-European countries.
Operation of the side air bags and windowbags is not disabled by the front air bag de-activation switch, as described in the previ-ous paragraphs.
Use the switch only withthe engine off and the ig-
nition key removed.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
39
IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, thus allowing correct window bag un-folding.
IMPORTANT The front and/or side airbags may be activated if the car is subjectedto heavy shocks or accidents that involve theunderbody area, such as for example violentbumps against steps, pavements or fixed ob-stacles on the ground, falling into big holesor bumpy roads.
IMPORTANT The triggering of air bagsreleases a small amount of powder. This pow-der is not harmful and does not indicate astart of fire; also the surfaces of the deployedbag and the car interior may be covered withdusty residue: this may irritate the skin andeyes. In the event of exposure, wash withneutral soap and water.
The airbag system has a validity of 14years for the pyrotechnic charge and 10years for the coil contact (see the plate lo-cated on the front left door near the lock).Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services forreplacement as these dates approach.
IMPORTANT If an accident has trig-gered the air bag, Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices must be contacted to have the de-vices activated replaced and to have thewhole system checked.
All operations involving checking, repair-ing and replacing components concerningthe Air bag must be carried out by AlfaRomeo Authorized Services.
If the car is to be demolished, Alfa RomeoAuthorized Services should be contacted be-forehand to have the system deactivated.
If the car changes ownership, the newowner must be informed of the instructionsfor use and of the above warnings and begiven this “Owner’s Manual“.
IMPORTANT The triggering of the pre-tensioners, front air bags and side bags isdecided by the electronic control unit in adifferentiated manner depending on the typeof crash. The failure to trigger one or moreof them does not necessarily indicate a sys-tem malfunction.
Never rest head, arms andelbows on the door, on the
windows and in the window bagarea to prevent possible injuriesduring the inflation phase.
WARNING
Never lean head, arms andelbows out of the window.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
40
GENERAL CAUTIONS
You are reminded thatwhen the ignition key is
engaged and in the MAR position,the Air bags can be triggered alsoon a stationary vehicle, if it isbumped by another moving vehi-cle. Therefore, even with the carstationary, never allow children onthe front seat. You are also re-minded that with the car station-ary, without the key engaged andturned, the Air bags are not trig-gered in the event of an impact; inthis case the failure to trigger theair bags should not be considereda system failure.
WARNING
Do not cover the back restof front seats with trims or
covers there are not set for the useof side bags.
WARNING
If the ¬ warning light doesnot turn on when turning the
ignition key to MAR or if it stays onwhen travelling, this could indicate afailure in safety retaining systems; un-der this condition air bags or preten-sioners could not trigger in the eventof collision or, in a restricted numberof cases, they could trigger acciden-tally. Stop the car contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services to have the sys-tem checked immediately.
WARNING
Never travel with objectson your lap, in front of the
chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be-tween your lips. Serious injury mayresult in the case of the air bag be-ing triggered.
WARNING
If the car has been stolenor an attempt to steal it
has been made, if it has been sub-jected to vandals or floods, havethe Air bag system checked by Al-fa Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNINGAlways keep your handson the steering wheel rim
when driving, so that if the Air bagis triggered, it can inflate withoutmeeting any obstacles. Do not dri-ve with the body bent forwards,keep the seat back rest in the erectposition and lean your back wellagainst it.
WARNING
Please don’t apply stickersor other objects to the
steering wheel, to the air-bag cov-er on the passenger's side or on theside roof lining to the upholsteryon the roof side. Don’t place ob-jects on the dashboard passenger’sside (such as mobile phones) be-cause they could tamper with thecorrect opening of the passenger’sair-bag and than cause serious in-juries to the vehicle occupants.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
41
Turning the ignition key toMAR the Fwarning light
(with the passenger’s front Air bagdeactivation switch at ON) turnson for about 4 seconds, and thenflashes for another 4 seconds toremind that the passenger’s Airbag and corresponding side Airbags will be activated in the eventof a crash, then it goes off.
WARNING
Do not hook rigid objects tothe coat hooks and to the
support handles.
WARNINGDo not wash the seat backwith pressurised water or
steam (by hand or at automaticseat washing stations).
WARNING
The front Air bags are de-signed to be triggered for
heavier crashes than the preten-sioners. It is therefore normal forthe pretensioners only to be trig-gered for crashes within the twoactivation thresholds.
WARNINGThe air bag does not re-place the seat belts, but in-
creases their effectiveness. Addi-tionally, as the front air bags arenot triggered for head-on collisionat low speed, side crashes, crash-es from behind or overturning, inthese cases the occupants are pro-tected only by the seat belts, whichmust, therefore, always be fas-tened.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
42
STEERINGWHEEL LEVERS
The devices and services controlled by thelevers on the steering wheel can only be ac-tivated with the ignition key at MAR.
LEFT-HAND LEVER
The left-hand lever controls the outer lightsexcept the fog lamps and rear fog guards.
When the outer lights are switched on, thevarious controls on the dashboard are illu-minated.
Only with the ignition key at PARK, re-gardless of the position of the knurled ring,the side lights and number plate lights stayon.
Position (1 or 2-fig. 57) of the levercauses the turning on only of the side lights(front and rear), on the right or left respec-tively.
Lights switched off (fig. 52)
When the pointer on the knurled ring is op-posite the symbol O the outer lights areswitched off.
Sidelights (fig. 53)
The sidelights are switched on by turningthe knurled ring from O to6.
The3 warning light on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.
Dipped-beam headlights (fig. 54)
These are switched on by turning theknurled ring from 6 to2.
fig. 52
A0A0063m
fig. 53
A0A0064m
Main beams (fig. 55)
To turn main beams on, set knurled ringto position 2, push the lever towards thedashboard (stable position); warning light1 on the instrument panel will turn on.
To set dipped-beams back pull the lever to-wards the steering wheel.
fig. 54
A0A0065m
fig. 55
A0A0066m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
43
Flashing (fig. 56)
The headlights are flashed pulling the levertowards the steering wheel (instable posi-tion) regardless of the position of theknurled ring. The 1 warning light on thecluster will come on at the same time.
IMPORTANT Only the main-beam lightsare flashed. To avoid penalties follow localregulations.
Direction indicators (fig. 57)
Regardless of the position of the knurledring, moving the lever to the stable positionwill:
up, position (1) - engage the right-handdirection indicators;
down, position (2) - engage the left-handdirection indicators.
One of the warning lights (R or E) willcome on on the instrument cluster at thesame time.
The lever is returned to its home positionautomatically and the indicators areswitched off when the steering wheel isstraightened.
IMPORTANT If you wish to signal arapid change of direction involving only aminimal movement of the steering wheel,the lever can be moved up or down withoutit clicking (unstable position). When re-leased, the lever will return to its home po-sition.
When low beams and fog lights turnedon, the external light control unit (integralinto the Body Computer) can behave ac-cording to one of the following logic:
– as the high beams are turned on, thelow beams turn off, in the meanwhile thefog lights remain on, and the starting con-ditions are restored, as soon as the lowbeams are turned on again;
– otherwise, when the high beams areturned on, the fog lights are turned off, andthey will automatically be turned on againwhen the high beams are turned off.
Hence, should the Body Computer be re-placed, the lights management logic coulddiffer from the previous one.
fig. 56
A0A0067m
fig. 58
A0A0067m
fig. 57
A0A0068m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
44
“Follow me home” device (fig. 58)
This function allows the illumination of thespace in front of the car for the length oftime set, and is activated with the ignitionkey at STOP or removed, pulling the left-hand stalk towards the steering wheel.
This function is activated pulling the leverwithin 2 minutes from when the engine isturned off. At each single movement of thelever, the staying on of the dipped beamsand sidelights is extended by 30 seconds upto a maximum of 3.5 minutes; the lightsswitch off automatically after the time set.
Each time the lever is operated, the 1warning light on the cluster turns on.
This function can be interrupted by keep-ing the lever pulled towards the steeringwheel for more than 2 seconds.
RIGHT-HAND LEVER
The right-hand lever is used to operate thewindscreen wiper-washer and rearscreenwiper-washer. The windscreen washer con-trol also activates the headlamp washers,if fitted.
fig. 59
A0A0070m
Windscreen wiper - washer (fig. 59-60)
The lever can be moved to five differentpositions, corresponding to:
A - Windscreen wiper off.
B - Intermittent.
With the lever in position (B), turning thering (F) four possible intermittent speedsare obtained:■ = intermittent slow.■■ = intermittent medium.■■■ = intermittent medium-fast.■■■■ = fast intermittent.
C - Continuous, slow.
D - Continuous, fast.
E - Fast, temporary (unstable position).
Operation in position (E) is limited to thetime the lever is held in this position. Whenthe lever is released, it returns to position(A) automatically stopping the wiper.
IMPORTANT When the wiper is on, en-gaging reverse gear automatically turns onthe rearscreen wiper.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
45
Rain sensor (fig. 61)
The rain sensor (A), fitted only on cer-tain versions, is an electronic device com-bined with the windscreen wiper which hasthe purpose of automatically adjusting thenumber of wipes during intermittent opera-tion, to the intensity of the rain.
All the other functions controlled by theright-hand lever remain unchanged.
The rain sensor is activated automaticallymoving the right-hand lever to position (B-fig. 59) and it has a range of adjustmentthat gradually varies between wiper sta-tionary (no wiping) when the windscreen isdry, to wiper at first continuous speed (con-tinuous, slow) with heavy rain.
Turning the knurled ring (F-fig. 59) itis possible to increase the sensitivity of therain sensor, obtaining a quicker change fromstationary when the windscreen is dry, tofirst continuous speed (continuous, slow).
Operating the windscreen washer with therain sensor activated (lever at position B)the normal washing cycle is performed atthe end of which the rain sensor resumes itsnormal automatic function.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the rainsensor is deactivated and the next time theengine is started (MAR position) it will notbe reactivated even if the lever has remainedin position (B). In this case to activate therain sensor, simply move the lever to (A)or (C) and then back to (B).
When the rain sensor is reactivated in thisway, the wiper performs at least one stroke,even if the windscreen is dry, to indicate thatreactivation has occurred.
The rain sensor is located behind the innerrear-view mirror in contact with the wind-screen and inside the area cleaned by thewiper and it controls an electronic controlunit which in turn controls the wiper motor.
“INTELLIGENT WASHING” FUNCTION”
Pulling the lever towards the steeringwheel (instable position) operates the wind-screen washer.
Keeping the lever pulled, with only onemovement it is possible to operate the wash-er jet and the wiper at the same time; in-deed, the latter comes into action auto-matically if the lever is pulled for more thanhalf a second.
The wiper stops working a few strokes af-ter releasing the lever; a further “cleaningstroke” after a few seconds completes thewiping operation.
fig. 60
A0A0071m
fig. 61
A0A0489m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
46
At each start, the rain sensor automaticallystabilises at a temperature of about 40°Cto eliminate any condensation from the con-trol surface and prevent the formation of ice.
The rain sensor is able to detect and au-tomatically adapt to the presence of the fol-lowing particular conditions which requiredifferent sensitivity:
– impurities on the control surface (salt,dirt, etc.);
– streaks of water caused by worn wiperblades;
– difference between day and night (thehuman eye is more disturbed during thenight by the wet glass surface).
Rearscreen wiper-washer (fig. 62-63)
Pushing the lever towards the dashboard(unstable position) operates the rearscreenwasher jet and continuous operation of therearscreen wiper.
Operation ends when the lever is released.
fig. 62
A0A0073m
fig. 63
A0A0075m
Turning the knurled ring (A) from positionO to ' operates the rearscreen wiper in-termittently.
Headlamp washers (fig. 64)
These come into operation when the wind-screen washer is turned on with thedipped/main beam headlights on.
IMPORTANT On certain versions whenthe headlamp washer is operating, the cli-mate control system automatically engagesinside air re-circulation, to prevent the smellof liquid detergent from entering the pas-senger compartment.
fig. 64
A0A0425m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
47
The device is disengaged automatically inany one of the following cases:
– pressing the brake pedal;
– pressing the clutch pedal;
– if the ASR or VDC, MSR system cuts in.
CONTROLS (fig. 65)
Cruise Control is controlled by theON/OFF knurled ring (A), by the +/–ring (B) and by the RES button (C).
Ring (A) has two positions:
– OFF in this position the device is deac-tivated;
– ON is the normal operating position ofthe device. When the knurled ring (A) isin this position, the warning light Ü on theinstrument cluster turns on.
Ring (B) serves for memorising and main-taining the car speed or for increasing or low-ering the speed memorised.
Turn the ring (B) to (+) to memorise thespeed reached or increase the speed mem-orised.
Turn the ring (B) to (–) to lower the speedmemorised.
Each time the ring is actuated (B) the speedincreases or lowers by about 1.5 km/h.
Keeping the ring turned the speed changescontinuously. The new speed reached willbe maintained automatically.
The RES button (C) resets the memorisedspeed.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP or the ring (A) to OFF, the speedmemorised is cleared and the system isswitched off.
CRUISE CONTROL
GENERAL
The speed regulator (CRUISE CON-TROL), with electronic control, makes itpossible to drive the car at the requiredspeed without pressing the accelerator ped-al. This reduces driving fatigue during longjourneys because the speed memorised isautomatically maintained.
IMPORTANT The device can only be en-gaged at speeds above 30 km/h.
fig. 65
A0A0077m
Cruise control must be ac-tivated only when the
route and traffic allow a constantspeed for a sufficiently long dis-tance completely safely.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
48
TO MEMORISE THE SPEED
Move the ring (A) to ON and take the carto the required speed normally. Turn the ring(B) to (+) for at least three seconds, thenrelease it. The car speed is memorised andit is therefore possible to release the accel-erator pedal.
The car will continue to travel at the mem-orised constant speed until one of the fol-lowing conditions takes place:
– pressing the brake pedal;
– pressing the clutch pedal;
– if the ASR or VDC system cuts in.
IMPORTANT In the case of need (whenovertaking for instance) acceleration is pos-sible simply pressing the accelerator pedal;later, releasing the accelerator pedal, the carwill return to the speed memorised previ-ously.
TO RESET THE MEMORISED SPEED
If the device has been disengaged for ex-ample pressing the brake or clutch pedal,the memorised speed can be reset as fol-lows:
– accelerate gradually until reaching aspeed approaching the one memorised;
– engage the gear selected at the time ofspeed memorising (4th, 5th or 6th speed);
– press the RES button (C).
TO INCREASE THE MEMORISED SPEED
The speed memorised can be increasedin two ways:
1) pressing the accelerator and then mem-orising the new speed reached (turning thering (B) for more than three seconds);
or
2) momentaneously turning the ring (B) to(+): each pulse of the ring will correspond toa slight increase in speed (about 1.5 km/h)while pressing continuously will correspondto a continuous speed increase. Releasing thering (B) the new speed will be memorisedautomatically.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
49
The device may only be engaged in 4th,5th or 6th gear, depending on the speedof the car. Travelling downhill with the de-vice engaged the car speed may increasemore than the memorised one, due to thechange in the engine load.
The ring (A) may be left constantly at ONwithout damaging the device. You are, how-ever, advised to switch the device off whennot in use, turning the ring to OFF, to avoidmemorising speeds by accident.
It is advisable to engage the cruise controlonly when the conditions of the traffic orroad so permit under completely safe con-ditions, i.e.: straight and dry roads, dual car-riageways or motorways, flowing traffic andsmooth road surface. Do not engage the de-vice in town or in heavy traffic conditions.
TO REDUCE THE MEMORISED SPEED
The speed memorised can be reduced intwo ways:
1) disengaging the device (for instancepressing the brake pedal) and then memo-rising the new speed (turning the ring (B)to (+) for at least three seconds);
2) keeping the ring pressed (B) at (–)until reaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.
Cruise Control can only beengaged at speeds above
30 km/h. The max. speed at whichthe Cruise Control can be engagedis 190 km/h, at speeds higher than190 km/h it will not be engaged.
WARNING
When travelling with thecruise control on, do not
move the gearshift lever to neu-tral.
WARNING
If the device is faulty ornot working, turn the ring
(A) to OFF and contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services after checkingthat the protection fuse is intact.
WARNING
RESETTING THE MEMORISEDSPEED
The memorised speed is automatically re-set turning off the engine or moving the ring(A) to OFF.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
50
DASHBOARD
1. Side swivel air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. Outer light control lever - 4. Speedometer with mileage recorder and trip recorderand headlamp aiming display - 5. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - 6. Multifunction display - 7. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge - 8. Rev counter - 9. Tailgate release button - 10. Card holder - 11. Radio - 12. Centre swivel air vents - 13. Fixed upper vent - 14.Glass holder - 15. Fog lamp button - 16. Hazard warning light switch - 17. Rear fog guard button - 18. Passenger’s front Air bag - 19. Glove-box - 20. Door locking button - 21. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 22. Cigar lighter - 23. Ashtray - 24. Temperaturesensor - 25. Windscreen/rearscreen wiper control lever - 26. Ignition key and switch - 27. Horn - 28. Steering wheel locking/release lever -29. Driver’s front Air bag - 30. Set of controls: trip meter reset, headlamp aiming device, trip computer - 31. Bonnet opening lever.
fig. 66A0A0426m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
51
MILEAGE RECORDER
Display with double meter (total and trip)and headlamp position display.
The display shows:– the mileage on the first line (6 figures) – the trip meter on the second line (4 fig-
ures)– the position relating to the headlamp
aiming device.
To reset the trip meter, keep the button(A-fig. 68) on the plate at the side of thesteering column pressed for a few seconds.
IMPORTANT If the battery is discon-nected the trip meter reading is not stored.
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warninglight - C. Speedometer - D. Display (mileagerecorder, trip meter and headlamp positiondisplay) - E. Reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay - F. Rev counter
REV COUNTER
The rev. counter shows engine rpm. The nee-dle pointed to the danger area (red) indicatesexcessive high engine speed. Do not drive forlong periods with the needle in this area.
IMPORTANT The electronic injection con-trol system gradually shuts off the flow of fu-el when the engine is “over-revving” resultingin a gradual loss of engine power.
When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden highering ofthe speed, this is normal as it takes place dur-ing normal operation, for example when en-gaging the climatecontrol system or the fan.In particular a slow change in the speed pre-serves the battery charge.
fig. 67A0A0427m
INSTRUMENT PANEL
fig. 68
A0A0466m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
52
IMPORTANT The temperature of the en-gine coolant may rise towards the maximumvalues (red zone) when the vehicle is dri-ven at low speeds, especially when the am-bient air temperature is high. In this case itis advisable to stop the vehicle and switchoff the engine for a few minutes, after whichthe journey can be resumed, preferably ata higher speed.
ENGINE COOLANT FLUIDTEMPERATURE GAUGE WITHMAXIMUM TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT
This shows the temperature of the enginecoolant fluid and begins when the fluid tem-perature exceeds approx. 50°C.
Normally the pointer should be towardsthe middle of the scale. If the pointer reach-es the higher temperatures of the scale (redarea) the request for vehicle performanceshould be decreased.
The turning on of the u warning light (onsome versions together with the messageshown on the reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay) indicates that the coolant fluid tem-perature is too high; in this case, stop theengine and contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE WITHRESERVE INDICATOR
This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.
The warning light K turns on to indicate thatapprox. 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank.
IMPORTANT Under certain conditions(heavy slopes, for instance), the reading onthe gauge may differ from the actual amountof fuel in the tank and changes in level maybe indicated late.
This condition falls within the operation log-ics of the electronic control circuit to avoidhighly unstable readings due to swaying ofthe fuel when travelling.
IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always beperformed with engine off and ignition keyto STOP. If the engine is off but the keyis to MAR, a wrong fuel level could tem-porarily be indicated. This is due to the in-ternal system control logic and cannot beconsidered as a system malfunctioning.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
53
RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
The reconfigurable multifunction display isable to display all the useful and necessaryinformation when driving and a menu allowsthe following adjustments and/or settings:TIMEDATEOUTSIDE TEMPERATUREINFORMATION ABOUT VEHICLE CONDITION
- Trip computer- Lighting adjustment (rheostat)- Display of failure messages with corre-
sponding symbol- Display of warning messages with cor-
responding symbol (e.g.: possible ice onroad)
Reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay menu
SPEED- Activation/deactivation of the corre-sponding indication (ON/OFF)
- Setting the speed limit
TRIP B- Activation/deactivation of the corre-
sponding function (ON/OFF)
TIME- Setting the hours- Setting the minutes
DATE- Setting the day- Setting the month- Setting the year
DST (SUMMER TIME)- Activation/deactivation of summer time
MODE 12/24- Selecting the clock mode on 12 or 24
hours
RADIO- Activation/deactivation of the following
items on the display:frequency or RDS message of the radiostation selected, compact disc and cor-responding track selected, cassette func-tion on
TELEPHONE- Activation/deactivation of the following
items on the display: incoming or out-going phone call with name and/ornumber of the subscriber connected
NAVIGATION- Activation/deactivation of the displays
and information concerning the route tobe followed
LANGUAGE- Setting the language of the messages
shown on the display
UNITS- Selection of the following units of mea-
sure: km, mi, °C, °F, km/l, l/100km,mpg
BUZZER- Buzzer volume adjustment
SERVICE- Display of information concerning correct
vehicle maintenance, strictly connectedwith the Scheduled Maintenance Pro-gramme
MENU OFF- Exits the menu.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
54
CONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 69-70)
To use the information the reconfigurable multifunction display is able to give (with the ignition key at MAR) you should firstly familiarisewith the control buttons (on the plate at the side of the steering column and on the top of the right lever) using them as described below. Be-fore doing anything you are also advised to read this chapter in full.
fig. 69
fig. 70
Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated withT in the following dia-grams to move to the next screen
Press for more than 4 seconds indicated withU in the following diagrams, toreset and then start a new journey
To scroll the display and the related options, upwards or to increase the valuedisplayed depending on the case
To scroll the display and the related options, down wards or decrease the valuedisplayed according to the case
Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated withQ in the following dia-grams, to confirm the choice required and/or move to the next screen or ac-cess the Menu
Press for more than 2 seconds indicated with R in the following diagrams,to confirm the choice required and return to the standard screen
A0A0022m
A0A0021m
IMPORTANT Buttonsâ andãactivate different functions depending on the followingsituations:
- When the standard screen is activated, they allow adjustment of the inner lighting- Within the menu they allow scrolling up or down- They make it possible to increase or decrease during setting operations.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
55
MENU OFFSPEED
TRIP B
TIME
DATE
DST (SUMMER TIME)
MODE 12/24
RADIOTELEPHONE
NAVIGATION
LANGUAGE
UNITS
BUZZER
SERVICE
DESCRIPTION OF THE MENU
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a “circular fashion”, which can be selected through the â andã buttons for accessto the different select operations and settings (see examples “LANGUAGE” and “DATE” below); for further details, also refer to “Access to themenu screen” in the previous chapter.
Day
Year Month
Q
Q
Français
Deutsch
Nederlands
Italiano
Español
English
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
56
If the display shows a failure message, see the details given in the“Warning lights” chapter; if there are two or more failures, the display
shows them in cycle, one after the other. To eliminate the display of themessage and/or of the warning light repeated on the rev counter by the reconfigurable multifunction display, press button Q.
INITIAL CHECK
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the reconfigurable multifunction display shows the message CHECK ACTIVE: the diagnostic phase of all theelectronic systems on the car has started, this lasts for about 4 seconds. If no faults are detected when the engine has started, the display showsthe OK message.
IMPORTANT If the reconfigurable multifunction display shows a failure message, see the details given in the “Warning lights” chapter.
Standard screen
The Programmed MaintenanceSchedule includes vehicle
maintenance every 20,000km; this is shown
automatically, with the ignitionkey at MAR, starting from
2,000 km (or miles) from thisdeadline and it is shown again
every 200 km.
If nofailuresarepresent
Is the engine
started?YES
NO
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
57
ACCESS TO MENU SCREEN
After the INITIAL CHECK, with the car stationary and with the standard screen, it is possible to access the menu screen: press Q.
To navigate use the â andã buttons.
Setting the limit speed is also possible with the car on the move.
If the waiting time (no operation) is above 10 seconds, the standard screen or the screen that was active before pressing the Q buttonis restored automatically; all the operations confirmed are stored.
Is the carmoving?
See next page to enter speed limit.
SPEEDTRIP BTIMEDATEDST (SUMMER TIME)MODE 12/24RADIOTELEPHONENAVIGATIONLANGUAGEUNITSBUZZERSERVICEMENU OFF
QSee
INITIAL CHECK NO
YES
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
58
SPEED
Wit this function it is possible to set the car speed limit which, if exceeded, automatically sounds a buzzer to alert the driver. To set thespeed limit, proceed as follows:
Use the â and/orãbuttons to set the speed required. During the setting operation the value flashes on the screen. Every press of the button increases
or decreases by one unit. Keeping the button pressed obtains automatic fast increaseor decrease. When you are near the required setting release the button and completeadjustment with single presses. The possible setting is between 30 and 250 km/h
or between 20 and 160 mph depending on the unit set previously (see UNITS paragraph described later).
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
This screen is shownautomatically on thedisplay, together with
the sounding of abuzzer, as soon as the
car exceeds the setspeed limit.
Q
R
Choose activation ordeactivation (ON/OFF)
Q
Q
R
âã
âã
âã
R
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
59
TRIP B (ON/OFF)
With this option it is possible to turn ON or OFF the TRIP B function (partial trip) which displays the figures relating to AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B,AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B, and TRAVEL DISTANCE B during a “partial mission” contained in the “general mission. For further information see“General Trip - Trip B”.
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
Return to standard screen
Q
Q
R
R
âã
âã
Using the â orã buttons
choose activation or deactivation ON/OFF
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
60
TIME
To adjust the clock (hours - minutes) proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
Q
Q
Q
R
R
R
âã
âã
âã
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
Each press on the â orãbutton increases or decreases
by one unit. Keeping thecorresponding button pressed
obtains automatic fast increaseor decrease. When you are nearthe required value, release the
control and complete adjustmentwith single presses.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
61
DATE
To correct the date (day - month - year) proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
Q
Q
Q
Q
R
R
R
R
âã
âã
âã
âã
Each press on the â orã button increases
or decreases by one unit. Keeping the
correspondingbutton pressed obtains automaticfast increase or decrease. Whenyou are near the required value,
release the control and complete adjustment
with single presses.
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
62
DST (SUMMER TIME)
To activate/deactivate the summer time function (which corresponds to + 1 hour in relation to the daylight time), proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
Selecting and activating the DST ON function,
the display switches from daylight time to summer time and vice versa, with no need
to intervene manually on the TIME function described
previously.
Q
Q
R
R
âã
âã
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
63
MODE 12/24
This function is used to set the clock in the 12 hour or 24 hour mode. To adjust, proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screenQ
Q
R
R
âã
âã
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
64
RADIO
In the RADIO DISPLAY ON condition, when the radio is turned on, the display repeats the display on the front panel of the radio itself. To ac-tivate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
Q
Q
R
R
âã
âã
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
65
TELEPHONE
In the TELEPHONE DISPLAY ON condition, when a phone call arrives, the display shows (if listed) the name and phone number of the caller.To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
Q
Q
R
R
âã
âã
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
66
NAVIGATION
In the NAVIGATION DISPLAY ON condition, during use of the radionavigator, the display repeats the display (pictograms) on the radionaviga-tor display itself. To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
Q
Q
R
R
âã
âã
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
67
LANGUAGE
To select the language required for the texts and messages shown on the display, proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
Q
Q
R
R
âã
âã
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
68
UNITS
The display provides information in relation to the unit of measure set. To choose the units required, proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
WARNINGThe units of temperature (°C or °F) set on the
multifunction display are also shown on the displays of the two-zone climate control and navigator.
Q
Q
Q
R
R
R
R
âã
âã
âã
âã
Q
R
âã Q
R
âã Q
R
âã Q
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
69
BUZZER
The buzzer that accompanies the controls in the car and any failure signals, can be adjusted to a pre-defined scale using theâ and/orãbuttons. To switch OFF or adjust, proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen
Return to standard screen
Q
Q
R
R
âã
âã
WARNINGIn the buzzer OFF condition any buzzer failure warnings
are maintained.
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
70
SERVICE
With the SERVICE function it is possible toreceive information connected with correctvehicle maintenance. To consult this func-tion, proceed as follows:
Menu screen
Return to menu screen Return to standard screen
WARNINGThe programmed Mainte-nance Schedule includes ve-hicle maintenance every20,000 km; this is shown
automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, start-ing from 2,000 km (or miles) from this deadline andit is shown again every 200 km. This display can on-ly be reset by Authorised Alfa Romeo Services.
Q
Q R
âã
â
ã
â
ã
â
ã
â
ã
â
ã
â
ã
â
ã
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
71
MENU OFF
This is the last function that closes the circular setting cycle listed in the initial menu screen.
Menu screen Return to standard screen
Qâã
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESSTO THE MENU SCREEN
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
72
GENERAL TRIP - TRIP B
The TRIP COMPUTER function enables displaying on the re-configurable multifunction display the engine oil temperature and the sizes rele-vant to the car operating conditions. This function comprises the GENERAL TRIP concerning the complete mission of the car and TRIP B con-cerning the partial car mission. This function (as shown in the graph below) is contained within the complete mission. Both functions are re-settable.
The GENERAL TRIP displays the figures relating to ACTUAL CONSUMPTION, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION, RANGE, AVERAGE VELOCITY, TRAVEL TIME (driving time),TRAVEL DISTANCE.
TRIP B (with automatic reset each time at least 2 hours have passed since stopping the engine), displays information concerning AVERAGE CON-SUMPTION B, AVERAGE VELOCITY B, TRAVEL TIME B (driving time), TRAVEL DISTANCE B.
Start of journey procedure (reset)To start a new journey monitored by the GENERAL TRIP, with the ignition key at MAR, press the button with U (see “Control buttons”).
The reset operation (pressing the U button) in the presence of the screens concerning the GENERAL TRIP also makes it possible to resetTRIP B. The reset operation (pressing the U button) in the presence of only the screens concerning TRIP B makes it possible to reset only theinformation associated with this function.
IMPORTANT The RANGE and ACTUAL CONSUMPTION information cannot be reset.
End of partial mission Start of new partial mission
Reset TRIP B
˙
Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission Start of new partial mission
˙
˙
Reset TRIP B
˙ ˙
˙
TRIP B
TRIP B
TRIP B
End of partial mission Start of new partial mission
End of partial mission Start of new partial mission
Reset TRIP B
GENERAL TRIP
End of complete missionStart of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP˙
End of complete mission Start of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP˙
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
73
Standard screen
Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP BU
SeeINITIAL CHECK
Continueson next page
T T
UU
T
U
T
U
T T TT
U
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
74
TRIP B ON?
WARNING Pressing the P button returnsautomatically to the standard screen.
TT
UUUU
T T
Reset TRIP BU
Return to standard screen
YES
NOContinued fromprevious page
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
75
DIMMER
With this function it is possible to adjust the lighting (dimming/brightening) of the instrument cluster, mileage recorder (total, trip meter),headlamp aiming display, radio display, radio navigator display and two-zone climate control.
Partial lighting
Keeping the ã button pressed (on the plate at the side of the steering column) for more than 4 seconds the instrument cluster lighting isturned off with the exception of the speedometer.
Keeping the â button pressed (on the plate at the side of the steering column) for more than 4 seconds the complete instrument clusterlighting is turned on again.
Standard screen
Return to standard screen
WARNINGWhen the outer lights are switched on dimming of the brightness can
be perceived. In the event of any faults, lighting adjustment (rheostat)is not possible and the display is shown at its maximum brightness.
Q R
âã
âã
SeeINITIAL CHECK
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
76
DISPLAYS IN CONCURRENCE WITH THE EVENT
Standard screen:when the radio isturned on in theRADIO DISPLAY ONcondition.
Standard screen:when a phone call isreceived in the TELEPHONEDISPLAY ON condition.
Display with the ignition key removed openingor closing a door.The reconfigurable multifunction displaytogether with the mileage recorder display(total and trip) is timed, after 10 seconds itgoes off automatically.
In the event of a failuresee the “Warning lights”chapter.
Standard screen:during assistednavigation in the NAVIGATION DISPLAYON condition.
The displays illustrated are purely indicative.
fig. 71
A0A0429m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
77
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
WARNING LIGHTS
IMPORTANT The presence of warning lights depends on the type of equipment with which the car is fitted.
xLOW BRAKE FLUID AND/OR HANDBRAKE ON
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go off afterapprox. 4 seconds.
The warning light turns on when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the mini-mum level, due to a possible leak in the circuit and when the handbrake is engaged.
uHIGH ENGINE COOLANT FLUID TEMPERATURE
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go off afterapprox. 4 seconds.
The warning light turns on together with the message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunc-tion display, when the engine is overheated. If it turns on when travelling, stop the car leaving theengine on and slightly accelerated to further activate the circulation of the coolant fluid.
If the warning light does not go off within the next 2 or 3 minutes, stop the engine and contactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services.
If the x warning light turns on when travelling check that the hand-brake is not engaged. If the warning light stays on together with the
message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display with the hand-brake off, stop the car immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
78
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
¬AIR BAG FAILURE
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial turns on, but it should go off afterapprox. 4 seconds The warning light stays on glowing steadily if there is an operating failure in theAir bag system.
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
If the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunc-tion display when travelling, stop the engine immediately and con-
tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
WARNING
If the ¬ warning light does not turn on when turning the ignition keyto MAR or if it stays on when travelling, this could indicate a failure in
safety retaining systems; under this condition air bags or pretensioners couldnot trigger in the event of collision or, in a restricted number of cases, they couldtrigger accidentally. Stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Servicesto have the system checked immediately.
WARNING
The failure of the ¬ warning light (warning light off) is also indicat-ed by the flashing for more than the normal 4 seconds of the pas-
senger’s front air bag deactivated warning light.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
79
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
INCOMPLETE DOOR CLOSING
The message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when one or bothdoors or the tailgate are not properly shut.
LOW BATTERY CHARGE
If the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when the engineis running, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services immediately.
<SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED
The warning light on the dial turns on glowing steadily when, with the ignition key turned to MAR,the driver’s seat belt is not correctly fastened.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
80
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
BRAKE PAD WEAR
The message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when the front brakepads are worn; in this case have them changed as soon as possible.
IMPORTANT As the car is fitted with wear sensors for the front brake pads, when changing them,also check the rear brake pads.
SELESPEED GEARBOX FAILURE
The message + symbol are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display when a fault to Se-lespeed gearbox is detected.
If warning light t and the message appear on the display, contact Al-fa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible to have the fault eli-
minated.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
81
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
U EOBD ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE
In normal conditions, turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light turns on, but it shouldgo off when the engine has started. The initial turning on indicates that the warning light is work-ing properly.
If the warning light stays on or turns on when travelling together with the message + symbol onthe reconfigurable multifunction display:
glowing steadily - means a fault in the supply/ignition system which could cause high emis-sions at the exhaust, possible lack of performance, poor handling and high consumption levels.
In these conditions it is possible to continue driving without however demanding heavy effort orhigh speeds. Prolonged use of the vehicle with the warning light on may cause damage. ContactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.
The warning light goes off if the fault disappears, but it is still stored by the system;
flashing - indicates the possibility of damage to catalyst (see “EOBD system” in this chapter).
If the warning light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed ofthe engine until the warning light stops flashing; continue the journey at moderate speed, trying toavoid driving conditions that may cause further flashing and contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Ser-vices as soon as possible.
If, turning the ignition key to MAR, the U warning light does notturn on or if it turns on glowing steadily or flashing when travelling,contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
82
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM
If with the engine running, the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services immediately.
If with the engine running, the message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay, this means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor device (see “Alfa RomeoCODE system” in this chapter). Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to have all the keys mem-orised.
INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
The message + symbol on the display are shown when the inertial fuel cut-off switch is triggered.
If after the display of the message the smell of fuel or leaks from thesupply system are noted,do not re-engage the switch to avoid the
risk of fire.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
83
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
>INEFFICIENT ABS SYSTEM
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light on the dial lights up, but it should go off afterapprox. 4 seconds.
The warning light turns on together with the message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunc-tion display, when the system is inefficient. In this case the braking system keeps its effectivenessunchanged, but without the potential offered by the ABS system. Caution is advisable, particularlyin all cases of less than perfect grip. It is therefore necessary to contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Ser-vices as soon as possible.
Inefficient EBD electronic braking distributor
x
>+ The car is fitted with electronic braking distributor (EBD). The turning
on at the same time of the x and> warning lights on the dial togeth-er with the message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display, withthe engine running indicates an EBD system failure; in this case heavy brakingmay cause the rear wheels to lock before time, with the possibility of skidding.Drive extremely carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorised Service to havethe system checked.
WARNING
The turning on only of the > warning light on the dial together withthe message + symbol on the reconfigurable multifunction display, with
the engine running normally indicates a failure of the ABS system only. In thiscase the braking system maintains its effectiveness, without however the an-tilock function. In these conditions, the effectiveness of the EBD may also be re-duced, In this case too, you are recommended to contact the nearest Alfa RomeoAuthorised Service immediately, driving in such a way as to avoid sharp brak-ing, to have the system checked.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
84
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
FPASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG DEACTIVATED
With the passenger’s front Air bag engaged, turning the ignition key to MAR the warning lightturns on, but should go off after 4 seconds.
áVDC SYSTEM (VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL)
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the dial turns on and it should go off afterapprox. 4 seconds.
If the warning light does not go out or stays on when travelling together with the message +symbol shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display, contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
The flashing of the warning light when travelling indicates the cutting in of the VDC system.
The warning light turns on when the passenger’s front Air bag is deactivated.
Warning light F indicates also warning light ¬ failure. This isindicated by intermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of warning light
F. In this event, warning light ¬ could be not up to indicate restraintsystem failures, if any. Stop the car and ontact Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices to have the system checked
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
85
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
LIGHT FAILURE
The message + symbol are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display when a fault to anyone of the following lights is detected:
- sidelights- braking lights and corresponding fuse- rear fog guards- number plate lights.
The failure referring to these lights could be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse ora cut-off electric connection.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
86
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED
The warning light turns on together with the message on the display and the sounding of a buzzerwhen the car speed exceeds the speed limit set previously (see “Reconfigurable multifunction dis-play” chapter).
KFUEL RESERVE
The warning light on the dial turns on together with the message + symbol on the reconfigurablemultifunction display, when about 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank and when autonomy is below50 km.
AUTONOMY (TRIP COMPUTER)
The message + symbol are shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when autonomy isbelow 50 km.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
This is shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display 2000 km from the deadline given inthe Scheduled Maintenance Programme (every 20,000 km) and it is shown again at timed inter-vals, turning the ignition key to MAR every 200 km.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
87
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
RLEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)
The warning light on the dial turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved downwards or, together with the right indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.
ERIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)
The warning light on the dial turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwardsor, together with the left indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed.
3SIDELIGHTS AND DIPPED-BEAMS
The warning light on the dial turns on when the sidelights or dipped beams are turned on.
CONSTANT SPEED ADJUSTMENT (CRUISE CONTROL)
The warning light on the instrument panel turns on when the constant speed adjustment ring nut(Cruise Control) is turned to the ON position.
Ü
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
88
Warninglight on dial
Messageon display
MAIN BEAMS
The warning light on the dial turns on when the main beams are turned on or when the “Followme home” device is turned on (see corresponding chapter).
1
WARNING LIGHT FAILURE
This is shown on the reconfigurable multifunction display when a fault is detected to one of thewarning lights indicated.
POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD
The symbol √ + message are shown by the reconfigurable multifunction display and the buzzersounds, when the outside temperature reaches or falls below 3°C to warn the driver of the possi-ble presence of ice on the road.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
89
1 Upper stationary vent for defrosting or demisting windscreen - 2 Upper centre adjustable vent - 3 Stationary vents for defrosting or demist-ing side windows - 4 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 5 Side adjustable and swivel outlets - 6 Front feet area fixed vents - 7 Rear feet areafixed vents - 8 Rear adjustable swivel outlet.
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
fig. 72
A0A0430m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
90 fig. 73 fig. 74 fig. 75
UPPER CENTRE VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 73)
The vent (1) has an opening/closing con-trol (A).
• = Completely closed.
I = Completely open.
CENTRE SWIVEL VENTSADJUSTMENT (fig. 73)
Each vent (2) has a lever (B) whichmakes it possible to direct the flow of air (inthe 4 directions: up/down, right/left).
To adjust the air flow, use control (C):
• = Completely closed.
I = Completely open.
SIDE SWIVEL OUTLETSADJUSTMENT (fig. 74)
To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) asrequired.
To adjust the air flow, use control (C):
• = Completely closed.
I = Partially open.
II = Completely open.
D - fixed vent for defrosting or demistingside windows.
REAR SWIVEL OUTLETADJUSTMENT (fig. 75)
To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) asrequired.
To adjust the air flow, use control (C):
• = Completely closed.
I = Partially open.
II = Completely open.
A0A0085m A0A0086m A0A0087m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
91
AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
To start the system (fig. 76):
- turn the knob rings to set the requiredtemperatures (driver’s side - passenger’sside).
- press the AUTO button.
IMPORTANT The climate control sys-tem makes it possible to personalise thetemperatures required on the two sides witha maximum difference of 7°C between thedriver’s side and the passenger’s side.
IMPORTANT The climate control com-pressor only works with the engine runningand an outside temperature above 4°C.
For further details about the system andhow to make the best use of it, read theinstructions given in the pages that follow.
A0A0203m
fig. 76
The coolant used for theclimate control system isR134a which meets cur-
rent regulations and does not harmthe environment in the event of ac-cidental spillage.Absolutely avoid the use of oth-
er fluids which are incompatiblewith the system components.
GENERAL
The car is fitted with a two-zone climatecontrol system, controlled by an electroniccontrol unit which makes it possible to sep-arately adjust the air temperature on the dri-ver’s side and on the passenger’s side. Toobtain optimum temperature control in thetwo areas of the passenger compartment,the system has an outside sensor, a pas-senger compartment sensor and a two-zonesun ray sensor.
With an outside tempera-ture below 4°C the climate
control compressor is unable towork. It is therefore unadvisableto use the inside air re-circulationfeature v with a low outsidetemperature as the windows mightmist over quickly.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
92
Air quality control is also entrusted to acombined particle and activated carbon fil-ter. The climate control system automaticallycontrols and adjusts the following parame-ters and functions:
– temperature of the air admitted to thepassenger compartment (for the driver’s andpassenger’s side separately)
– fan speed– air distribution – inside air re-circulation on/off– climate control compressor on/off en-
able.
It is possible to change the setting of thefollowing functions manually:
– fan speed– air distribution – inside air re-circulation on/off– climate control compressor on/off en-
able.
The control of functions not changed man-ually remains automatic and in any case thetemperature of the air admitted to the pas-senger compartment is controlled automati-cally according to the temperatures set onthe driver’s and passenger’s displays.
IMPORTANT Manual selections prevailover automatic ones and remain in storageuntil the user decides to resume automaticcontrol. The settings selected manually arestored when the engine is switched off andresumed the next time it is started.
To ensure correct opera-tion of the incipient mist-ing sensor, stickers must
not be applied (road licence holder,time card etc.) in the “control”area between the sensor and thewindscreen. Care should also begiven to cleaning the windscreenand the actual sensor, avoiding theaccumulation of dust and other sub-stances.
IMPORTANT The demisting procedureis enabled each time the ignition key isturned to MAR or pressing the AUTO but-ton. When this procedure is working it canbe turned off pressing one of the followingbuttons: compressor, air re-circulation, airflow, air capacity. This operation inhibits theincipient misting sensor signal until the AU-TO button is pressed again or the next timethe ignition key is turned to MAR.
On certain versions, the system is inte-grated by an antipollution sensor capable ofautomatically switching on inside air re-cir-culation to lessen the harmful effects of pol-luted air in cities, queues, tunnels and op-eration of the windscreen washer (with thetypical smell of spirits).
IMPORTANT The function of the an-tipollution sensor is subordinate to safetyconditions; therefore disabling the climatecontrol compressor or at an outside tem-perature below 4°C the sensor is disabled.The sensor can be re-enabled pressing there-circulation button v until taking it tothe automatic mode.
On some versions the system is integrat-ed with an incipient misting sensor installedbehind the inside rear-view mirror, capableof “controlling” a predefined area of thewindscreen inner surface which can auto-matically act on the system to prevent or re-duce misting through a series of operationssuch as: opening air re-circulation, enablingthe compressor, air flow to the windscreen,fan speed sufficient for demisting; in thecase of heavy misting, enabling the MAX-DEF function.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
93
CONTROLS (fig. 77)1 - Inside temperature set display (driver’s
side)
2 - Inside temperature adjustment knob(driver’s side)
3 - Fan speed set and system off display(OFF)
4 - Knob for adjusting the fan speed andswitching the system off
5 - Inside temperature set display (pas-senger’s side)
6 - Inside temperature adjustment knob(passenger’s side)
7 - Maximum defrosting/demistingon/off button for windscreen and front sidewindows, rearscreen heating and wing mir-ror coils (MAX-DEF function-)
8 - Inside air re-circulation on/off buttonv (manual/automatic)
9 - Rearscreen heating and wing mirror de-frosting on/off button (10 - Air distribution selection buttons
11 - Inside air temperature sensor
12 - Button for aligning the temperatureset on the passenger’s side with that on thedriver’s side MONO
13 - Button for selecting the system au-tomatic mode AUTO
14 - Climate control compressor on/offenable button √
fig. 77
A0A0090m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
94
HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATICTWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM (fig. 77)
IMPORTANT The knob rings do nothave a mechanical stopper therefore, oncethe maximum or minimum value has beenreached, they are free to turn in both direc-tions.
The system can be started in differentways, but it is advisable to set the temper-atures required on the displays, then pressthe (13) AUTO button.
This way the system will start workingcompletely automatically to reach the tem-peratures set as quickly as possible and thenmaintain them.
During completely automatic system op-eration, the temperatures set can bechanged at any time: the system will auto-matically change its settings to adjust to thenew requirements.
IMPORTANT To be able to be accept-ed by the system, the difference in tem-perature between the driver’s and passen-gers side must be within a range of 7°C.
It is possible to personalise the choicesmade automatically by the system inter-vening manually on the following controls:
– fan speed adjustment knob (4)
– air distribution selection buttons (10)
– inside air re-circulation on/off button(8)v
– climate control on enable button (14)√ .
Manually selecting one or more of thesefunctions turns off the right led on the but-ton (13) AUTO.
With one or more functions engaged man-ually, the adjustment of the temperature ofthe air admitted to the passenger compart-ment continues to be controlled automati-cally by the system (left led on button 13AUTO on) except with the climate controlcompressor off.
In fact, in this condition, the air admitedto the passenger compartment cannot havea lower temperature than the outside air;this condition is indicated by the turning offof the two leds on button (13) AUTO andflashing on the display (1) and/or (5) re-lated with the temperature rate that can-not be obtained.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
95
AIR TEMPERATUREADJUSTMENT KNOBS (fig. 78)
Turning the rings of knobs (2 or 6), clock-wise or counter-clockwise, respectively high-ers or lowers the temperature of the air re-quired respectively in the left zone (knob 2)or right zone (knob 6) of the passengercompartment. The temperatures set areshown on the displays (1) and (5) abovethe knobs.
Separate operation of the temperatures setis restored automatically using knob (6).
Turning the knob rings clockwise orcounter-clockwise until they reach the ex-treme selections HI or LO, the maximumheating or cooling functions are respective-ly engaged:
A0A0204m
fig. 78
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
96
HI function (highest heating power - fig. 79)
This is turned on setting on the display atemperature above 32.5°C, and can be ac-tivated independently from the driver’s orpassenger’s side or both; this setting bringsthe system to the “monozone” mode andis shown on both displays.
This function can be engaged when re-quiring to heat the passenger compartmentas quickly as possible, exploiting the maxi-mum potential of the system.
This function uses the maximum temper-ature of the coolant fluid, while air distribu-tion and fan speed are controlled accordingto the system settings.
This function is unadvisable withthe engine cold to prevent admit-ting air that is not warm enough tothe passenger compartment.
All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.
To switch the system off, simply turn thering of knob (2) or (6) of the temperatureset to a value below 32.5°C; the oppositedisplay will show 32.5°C.
A0A0218m
fig. 79
Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 32.5°C and returnsto an operating condition with automatic tem-perature adjustment.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
97
LO function(highest cooling power - fig. 80)
This is turned on setting on the display atemperature below 16.5°C; this setting isshown on both displays.
This function can be engaged when re-quiring to cool the passenger compartmentas quickly as possible, exploiting the maxi-mum potential of the system.
The function cuts off air heating, engagesinside air re-circulation (to prevent admittinghot air to the passenger compartment) andthe climate control compressor, takes air dis-tribution to R E and the fan speed as set bythe system.
All manual settings are possible with thisfunction on.
To switch the function off, simply turn thering of knob (2) or (6) of the temperatureset on a value above 16.5°C; the oppositedisplay will show 16.5°C.
Pressing key (13) AUTO the display willshow a temperature of 16.5°C and returnsto an operating condition with automatictemperature adjustment.
A0A0219m
fig. 80
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
98
MONO BUTTON FORALIGNMENT OF THETEMPERATURES SET (fig. 81)
Pressing button (12) MONO automaticallyaligns the the temperature on the passen-ger’s side with that on the driver’s side,therefore it is possible to set the same tem-perature between the two zones simply turn-ing the ring of knob (2) on the driver’s side.
This function is provided to simplify tem-perature adjustment of the whole passen-ger compartment when only the driver is onboard.
Separate operation of the temperatures setis automatically restored when the passen-ger uses the ring on knob (6) or pressesbutton (12) MONO.
A0A0207m
fig. 81
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
99
FAN SPEEDADJUSTMENT KNOB(fig. 82-83)
Turning the ring of knob (4), clockwiseor counter-clockwise, increases or decreas-es the speed of the fan, thus the amountof air admitted to the passenger compart-ment; the 16 selectable speeds are shownon a bar (in steps of 3) up to a maximumof 6 bars lit:
- maximum fan speed = all bars lit;- minimum fan speed = one bar lit.The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only
if the climate control compressor has beenswitched off pressing button (14)√. Torestore automatic fan speed control, after amanual adjustment, press button (13)AUTO. Completely turning the ring of knob(4) counter-clockwise switches the systemoff, with the following situation: display (1)off; display (5) off; centre display (3) withlit display OFF and left led on inside air re-cir-culation button (8)v on.
IMPORTANT Pressing the inside air re-circulation button (8)vit is possible toobtain the inlet of untreated outside air tothe passenger compartment.
To turn the system on again, simply turnthe ring of knob (4) clockwise, or press anyone button, except the inside air re-circula-
tion (8) and rearscreen heating (9) but-tons; this operation restores all the operatingconditions stored previously.
IMPORTANT On leaving the OFF condi-tion, inside air re-circulation v returns tothe condition prior to switching off.
A0A0205m
A0A0206mfig. 82
fig. 83
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
100
AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTIONBUTTONS (fig. 84)
Pressing one or more buttons (10) it ispossible to manually choose one of the 5possible air distributions to the passengercompartment:
R E Flow of air to the dashboard centreand side outlets and rear outlet.
R E Splitting of the air flow between thevents to the lower part of the pas-senger compartment (warmest air)and the dashboard centre and sideoutlets and the rear outlet (coolestair). This air flow distribution is par-ticularly useful in spring and au-tumn,when the sun is shining.
Z Air flow towards the front and rearlower parts of the passenger com-partment. Due to the natural tenden-cy of heat to spread upwards, thistype of distribution allows heating ofthe passenger compartment in theshortest time, also giving a promptfeeling of warmth to the coldest partsof the body.
A0A0208m
Q Splitting of the air flow between thewindscreen and side window defrost-ing/demisting vents and the lowerpart of the vehicle. This type of air dis-tribution allows satisfactory heatingof the passenger compartment whilepreventing possible misting of the win-dows.
Q Air flow to the windscreen and frontside window vents to demist or de-frost them.
IMPORTANT Pressing one of these but-tons turns on (led on button itself on) or off(led on button off) the associated functionif the combination chosen is among the 5possible ones, if not it only activates themain function of the button pressed, with-out the possibility of turning off with anotherpress (at least in one distribution the air flowshould be spread in the passenger com-partment).
To restore automatic air distribution controlafter a manual selection, press button (13)AUTO.
Z
Z
fig. 84
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
101
press button (13) AUTO; in which case,however, the other manual settings set willbe cancelled.
CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR ON/OFF ENABLEBUTTON√ (fig. 85)
Pressing button (14)√ enables the turn-ing on of the climate control compressor.This condition is shown by the lighting up ofthe led on the button itself.
When the climate control compressor isturned off, the leds on buttons (13) AUTOand (14)√ go off; automatic inside air re-circulation control is also excluded (both ledsoff on button 8 v) which always staysoff to prevent misting the windows; evenif unadvisable, it is still possible to restoreautomatic operation of inside air re-circula-tion pressing button (8)v.
With the climate control compressor off, itis not possible to admit air to the passengercompartment with a temperature belowthe outside temperature; in this case, thevalue flashes on the display concerning thetemperature that cannot be reached and theleft led on button (13 AUTO - fig. 86)goes off.
The switching off of the climate controlcompressor remains in storage even whenthe engine has been stopped. To restore au-tomatic control for switching on the climatecontrol compressor, press button (14)√again, the led on the button turns on, or
A0A0210m
A0A0211mfig. 85
fig. 86
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
102
INSIDE AIR RE-CIRCULATIONON/OFF BUTTON v(fig. 87)
Inside air re-circulation is controlled ac-cording to three operating logics
- automatic control, indicated by the turn-ing on of the right led on the button;
- forced engagement (inside air re-circula-tion always on), indicated by the turning onof the left led on the button (and by the rightled going off at the same time);
- forced switching off (inside air re-circula-tion always off with air inlet from outside),indicated by the turning off of both leds.
These operating conditions are obtainedpressing in sequence the inside air re-circu-lation button (8)v.
When inside air re-circulation is controlledautomatically by the system, the right led
on the air re-circulation button (8) vstays on all the time and the left led showsthe air re-circulation condition:
on = air re-circulation operating;
off = air re-circulation off.
If inside air re-circulation has been turnedon or off manually, the led on button (13)AUTO turns off.
In automatic operation, inside air re-circu-lation is turned on automatically when the an-tipollution sensor detects the presence of pol-luted air, for example in cities, queues, tun-nels and operation of the windscreen wash-er (with the characteristic smell of spirit).
A0A0212m
fig. 87
With the outside temper-ature below 4°C the cli-
mate control compressor is unableto work. It is therefore unadvis-able to use the inside air re-circu-lation feature v with low out-side temperature as the windowsmay quickly mist over.
WARNING
Operation of the climate con-trol compressor is necessary
for cooling and dehumidifying the air;it is advisable to keep this functionalways on, to prevent window mist-ing problems.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
103
AUTOMATIC OPERATION AUTOBUTTON (fig. 88)
Pressing the (13) AUTO button the sys-tem automatically adjusts the amount anddistribution of the air admitted to the pas-senger compartment, cancelling all the pre-vious manual adjustments.
This condition is indicated by the lightingup of both leds on the button itself.
When the right led, on button (13) AU-TO, is off, this means that one or more man-ual operations have been carried out andtherefore automatic control is not complete(except temperature control which is alwaysautomatic) indicated by the left led on, orthat the system is in the OFF condition.
A0A0209m
fig. 88
The inside air re-circulationsystem makes it possible
to reach the required “heating” or“cooling” conditions faster. It ishowever inadvisable to use it onrainy/cold days as it would con-siderably increase the possibility ofthe windows misting inside, espe-cially if the climate control systemis off.
WARNING
In certain weather condi-tions (e.g.: outside tem-
perature around 0°C) and with au-tomatic air re-circulation control on,mist may form on the windows. Inthis case press the inside air re-cir-culation button (8) v, to switchoff re-circulation (leds on buttonoff) and if necessary increase theflow of air to the windscreen.
WARNINGIt is advisable to turn onthe inside air re-circulation
system in queues or tunnels toavoid admitting polluted air fromoutside. The prolonged use of thisfunction should however be avoid-ed, especially with several personson board, to avoid the possibility ofthe windows misting inside.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
104
QUICK FRONT WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTINGBUTTON(- MAX-DEF function) (fig. 89)
Pressing button (7)- the climate con-trol automatically activates timed operationof all the functions needed to quickendemisting/defrosting of the windscreen andfront side windows, i.e.:
- it turns on the climate control compres-sor;
- switches off inside air re-circulation, if on(both leds off);
- sets the maximum air temperature (HI)on both displays (1) and (5);
- operates the fan at a predefined speed;
- directs the flow of air towards the wind-screen and front side window vents;
- turns on rearscreen heating and, if pre-sent, the wing mirror coils.
When the maximum demisting/defrostingfeature is on, the led on button (7)-, theled on the rearscreen heating button (9)( and the led on button (14)√ turn on;at the same time the leds on button (8)v go off.
IMPORTANT If the engine is not warmenough, the function will not engage thepredefined fan speed immediately, to limitthe flow to the passenger compartment ofair that is not warm enough to demist thewindows.
When the maximum demisting/defrost-ing function is on, the only manual opera-tions possible are manual adjustment of thefan and switching rearscreen heating off.
Pressing one of the following buttonsagain: (7)-, (8)v, (12) MONO,(13) AUTO or (14)√ the system switch-es off the maximum demisting/defrostingfunction, restoring the operating conditionsof the system prior to turning it on, in ad-dition to activating the last function required,if any.
A0A0213m
fig. 89
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
105
WING MIRROR AND REARSCREENDEFROSTING/DEMISTINGBUTTON( (fig. 90)
Pressing button (9)( turns on demist-ing/defrosting of the rearscreen and, if pre-sent, the wing mirror coils.
The turning on of this function is shown bythe turning on of the led on the button.
This function is timed and switches off au-tomatically after 20 minutes, or pressing thebutton again; the function is also switchedoff when the engine is stopped and will notbe switched on again the next time the en-gine is started.
IMPORTANT The system turns onrearscreen heating automatically if the tem-perature is below 3°C.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rearscreen over the heat-ing filaments to avoid damage that mightcause it to stop working properly.
POLLEN FILTER
Have the conditions of the filter checkedby Alfa Romeo Authorised Services at leastonce a year, preferably at the onset of sum-mer.
If the vehicle is used mainly in dusty or pol-luted areas it should be checked and if nec-essary replaced, at shorter intervals.
A0A0214m
The filter has the specific capability of com-bining the mechanical filtering of the air withan electrostatic effect so that the outside airadmitted to the passenger compartment ispurified and free of particles such as dust,pollen, etc.
In addition to the above, it also effective-ly reduces the concentration of pullutants.
The filtering action takes place under allair inlet conditions and it is clearly most ef-fective with the windows shut.
The failure to replace thefilter may considerably re-duce the effectiveness of
the climate control system up toblocking the air flow from the out-lets and vents.
fig. 90
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
106
CONTROLS
TAILGATE OPENING (fig. 91)
Electric tailgate release is only allowed withthe ignition key in the ignition switch atMAR vehicle stationary, at STOP orPARK for 3 minutes without opening/clos-ing a door. To release the tailgate, press but-ton (A) on the centre console panel.
FOG LIGHTS (fig. 91)
These are turned on pressing button (B)on the centre console panel, when the out-er lights are already on, at the same timethe led on the button itself turns on.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the foglights are turned off automatically and donot come on the next time the engine isstarted without pressing button (B).
Press button (B) again to switch off.
IMPORTANT The front foglights shouldbe used in compliance with local traffic laws.
fig. 91
A0A0091m
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(fig. 91)
These are switched on by pressing button(C), on the centre console panel, regardlessof the position of the ignition key.
When the hazard warning lights areswitched on, the switch itself begins to flashtogether with the direction indicators andthe direction indicator warning lights on theinstrument cluster. This function is switchedoff by pressing the button again.
Use the hazard warninglights in compliance with
local regulations.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
107
If no leaks are found the vehicle can berestarted. Press button (A) to activate thefuel supply system again.
fig. 92
A0A0318m
REAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 91)
These are turned on, with the dipped beamheadlights or fog lights on, pressing button(D) on the centre console panel, at thesame time the warning light on the buttonitself turns on.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the fogguards are automatically turned off and theydo not come on the next time the engineis started unless button (D) is pressed. Toturn them off press button (D).
IMPORTANT Always use the rear fogguards in compliance with local regulations.
DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM (fig. 91)
To lock the doors simultaneously, press but-ton (E) on the centre console panel, re-gardless of the position of the ignition key.
The deterrent led turns on as follows:
– with the ignition key at MAR glowingsteadily with a yellow light.
– with the ignition key at STOP flash-ing with a red light (deterrence condition).
INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFFSWITCH (fig. 92)
This is an automatic safety switch, to befound on the floor next to the driver’s doorpillar, which is triggered in the event of acrash of a certain magnitude to interrupt theflow of fuel.
The cutting in of the inertial switch is shownon the display of the instrument cluster.
If a smell of fuel is notedfollowing an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoidthe risk of fire do not reset theswitch.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
108
HAND BRAKE (fig. 94)
The hand brake lever is located betweenthe two front seats.
To operate the brake when the vehicle isstationary, pull lever (A) upwards, until therequired braking action is obtained.
When the ignition key is at MAR thewarning light on the instrument cluster xwill come on.
fig. 94
A0A0490m
The display (B), in the tachometer showsthe positions during adjustment.
For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:
– position 0: one or two people occupy-ing the front seats
– position 1: five people;– position 2: five people + load in the
boot;– position 3: driver + maximum permis-
sible load all stowed in lug-gage compartment
fig. 93
A0A0467m
HEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE(fig. 93) (excluding versionswith Xenon headlights)
The headlights should be aimed correctlydepending on the vehicle load.
To do this, use the rocker button (A), onthe plate at the side of the steering column:
– press the arrow on the button (A), toincrease by one position (eg.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟ 2➟ 3);
– press the arrow on the button (S), tolower by one position (eg.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟ 1➟ 0).
Adjust the beams every timethe load carried changes.
WARNING
The wheels should belocked after a few clicks of
the hand brake. If this does not oc-cur contact Alfa Romeo Authorisedservices to have the hand brakeadjusted.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
109
To release the hand brake:
– slightly lift the lever (A) and press therelease button (B);
– keeping the button pressed lower thelever, the warning light x on the instru-ment cluster will go out.
To prevent the car from moving acciden-tally, keep the brake pedal pressed whenengaging the hand brake.
IMPORTANT The hand brake lever (A)is fitted with a safety device which preventsthe brake from being released when, withthe lever pulled, button (B) is pressed.Therefore, to release the brake, in additionto pressing button (B) it is also necessaryto pull lever (A) further upwards to releasethe safety device, then lower the lever com-pletely.
IMPORTANT On certain versions abuzzer sounds to alert the driver if the caris moved with the hand brake engaged.
GEARSHIFT LEVER (fig. 95)
The position of the single gears is shownby the pictogram on the gearshift leverknob.
When shifting gear, always fully depressthe clutch pedal. Before engaging reversegear (R) wait for the car to be stationary.
For versions fitted with six speed gearbox,to engage reverse gear (R), raise the ringunder the grip (with the fingers of the samehand holding the lever).
After engaging reverse gear, release thering. It is not necessary to raise the ring onthe lever when shifting from reverse to an-other gear.
fig. 95
A0A0410m
To change gear smoothly,the clutch pedal must be
fully depressed. Therefore, thereshould be no obstacles on the floorunder the pedal unit: make surethat any mats are well laid and donot interfere with the pedals.
WARNING
IMPORTANT Reverse gear may only beengaged with the car completely at a stand-still. With the engine running, before en-gaging reverse gear it is necessary to waitfor at least 3 seconds with the clutch pedalfully depressed to prevent clashing and thepossibility of damaging the gears.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
110
SELESPEEDTRANSMISSION
The car may be fitted with a mechanicaltransmission with electronic control called“Selespeed”.
The Selespeed considerably simplifies useof the car, reducing the fatigue of city dri-ving or when frequent gearshifting is re-quired, at the same time offering brilliantperformance.
IMPORTANT To be able to use the Se-lespeed correctly, this chapter should be readin full to understand the correct, permissibleoperations to be carried out right from thestart.
This device comprises a conventional me-chanical gearbox to which an electronical-ly-operated electrohydraulic device has beenadded which automatically controls theclutch and gear engagement.
The clutch pedal has been eliminated andthe vehicle moves off using only the accel-erator pedal.
Gearshifting takes place through the con-trol lever (A-fig. 96) which is of the float-ing type with a “single central stable posi-tion”.
Using the lever it is possible to request anincrease/decrease of the gear ratio engagedand/or reverse gear engagement (R) orneutral (N).
There are also two stalks on the steeringwheel spokes (fig. 97) through which, on-ly with the car on the move (with speedabove 2 km/h), it is possible to shift gearup or down.
The gearbox can work in two operatingmodes:
– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL),in which the driver directly requests gearshift-ing through the lever on the centre consoleor pressing the buttons at the steeringwheel;
– the second is automatic, called CITY,in which the system decides directly whento shift gear (mode selectable with the spe-cific button A-fig. 98).
fig. 97
A0A0098m
fig. 98
A0A0096m
fig. 96
A0A0097m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
111fig. 99
A0A9017g
fig. 100
A0A9081g
With the gearbox in the CITY mode it isstill possible to carry out manual gearshift-ing, both using the gear lever and the steer-ing wheel controls. The gearbox remains inthe CITY mode.
The gear engaged (fig. 99) is always sig-nalled on the display regardless of the se-lected mode.
N = neutral;
1 = first gear;
2 = second gear;
3 = third gear;
4 = fourth gear;
5 = fifth gear;
6 = sixth gear
R = reverse.
Failures of the Selespeed gearbox are sig-nalled to the driver through a warning light(t) connected with the associated fail-ure message (fig. 100) and accompaniedby an acoustic signal.
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
IMPORTANT When the driver’s door isopened the Selespeed starts the hydraulicpart of the system to prepare it for when theengine is started. This function (noted bythe turning of the electric pump) is deacti-vated after 10 door openings/closings notfollowed by actual system activation turningthe ignition key.
Turning the ignition switch to MAR, af-ter about one second, the reconfigurablemultifunction display shows the gear en-gaged (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, R); from thismoment onwards, the Selespeed system ac-cepts gearshift commands.
IMPORTANT If after 10 seconds the re-configurable display does not show the gearengaged or the warning light t (togeth-er with the message shown by the display)stays on, turn the ignition key to STOP andwait for the display to turn off, then repeatsystem switch on. If the fault persists, con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
112 fig. 103
A0A0103m
fig. 101
A0A0101m
fig. 102
A0A0102m
OPERATION WITHENGINE OFF
IMPORTANT Before using the gearshiftcontrol lever, always check the gear en-gaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,R).
With the vehicle stopped and the brakepedal pressed, requests to change gear areaccepted only through the control lever onthe centre console.
To request gearshifting, in addition to keep-ing the brake pedal pressed:
– to shift upwards (+) (fig. 101) pushthe lever “forwards” (if the car is in first gearit shifts to second, if in second it shifts tothird and so on up to fifth). If the systemis in neutral (N) or reverse (R) moving thelever forwards causes the engagement offirst gear (1).
– to shift downwards (–) (fig. 101)push the lever backwards (if the car is infifth gear it shifts to fourth, if in fourth itshifts to third and so on down to first gear).
To allow setting the transmission to neu-tral (N), starting from the condition withthe vehicle stationary and brake pedalpressed, move the gearshift lever to the right(fig. 102). The neutral control (N) is ac-cepted with car speed below 60 km/h.
From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) andwith the car practically stationary, it is pos-sible to request the engagement of reversegear pushing the lever to the right and thenbackwards (fig. 103). If the car is moving,the request is not accepted. Wait for the carto stop and then request gear engagementagain.
IMPORTANT Once a gear has beenchanged it is necessary to immediately re-lease the gearshift control lever after mak-ing the request. A manoeuvre prolonged(over 10 seconds) causes the systemswitches automatically to CITY.
IMPORTANT When parking the vehicleon a sloping road and engaging a gear tokeep it braked, always check that the re-configurable multifunction display shows thenew gear engaged and wait for one or twoseconds before releasing the brake pedal toallow complete engagement of the clutch.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
113
STARTING THE ENGINE
The engine can be started either with agear engaged or in neutral (N) providedthat the brake pedal is fully depressed.
IMPORTANT If the brake pedal is notdepressed, the starter motor will not turn,thus preventing the engine from being start-ed.
After starting, the gearbox sets to neutralautomatically, the reconfigurable multifunc-tion display shows the letter (N) and thesystem selects the semiautomatic operatingmode (manual).
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEAND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
Turning the ignition key to STOP the en-gine turns off but the Selespeed system isstill active waiting for the car to stop com-pletely. After about 2 - 4 seconds from whenthe key has been moved to STOP, the hy-draulic part is deactivated and the reconfig-urable multifunction display is turned off im-mediately afterwards; at this point is the Se-lespeed system deactivated.
The gear selected before switching off theengine remains engaged.
If the engine is stopped with the gearboxin neutral (N), the buzzer calls the driver’sattention so that the car can be put in safe-ty conditions engaging first gear (1) or re-verse (R). In this case, the ignition keyshould be turned to MAR and with thebrake pedal pressed, engage first gear (1)or reverse (R).
IMPORTANT If the engine is stoppedwith the CITY mode engaged, this will bestored by the system. Indeed, the next timethe engine is started, this condition will stillbe active.
IMPORTANT Should the engine go offwith the car on the move, the next time itis started the Alfa Romeo CODE warninglight (Y) may come on. In this case checkthat the warning light goes off turning theengine off and on again with the vehicle sta-tionary. If not contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.
NEVER leave the car withthe gears in neutral (N).
WARNING
Never remove the ignitionkey when the car is mov-
ing. In addition to the fact that theSelespeed system would not workproperly up to stopping the car, thesteering wheel would lock auto-matically the first time it is turned.
WARNINGIf the engine fails to startwith the gear engaged, the
driver is informed of the potential-ly dangerous situation due to thefact that the gearbox is in neutralby the buzzer and by the reconfig-urable multifunction display.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
114
MOVING THE CAR
With the engine on and the car stationary,the gears that can be engaged for movingoff are only first (1), second (2) and/orreverse (R).
To shift gears, keep the brake pedalpressed and use only the lever on the cen-tre console since the stalks on the steeringwheel can be only operated if the car speedexceeds 10 km/h.
IMPORTANT Reverse gear (R) can beengaged from any of the following other ra-tios: neutral (N), first (1) or second (2).If the car is moving, the request is not ac-cepted, it is necessary to wait for the carto stop completely and request the en-gagement of reverse again (R).
The driver is informed of the reverse gearengaged condition by the reconfigurablemultifunction display on the instrument clus-ter and by the intermittent sound of abuzzer.
IMPORTANT If when shifting from re-verse (R) ➞ first (1) or neutral (N) ➞ first(1) sticking occurs on first gear, the systemautomatically engages second gear (2).This is not to be considered as a fault as itis part of the operating logic. For the samereason, in the case of sticking on reversegear, the system partially closes the clutchto allowgear engagement; in this case theengagement of reverse gear (R) will not beas smooth as usual.
Moving off of the car is obtained:
1) releasing the brake pedal;
2) gradually pressing the accelerator pedal.
The more the accelerator is pressed thehigher the pickup torque.
When the ASR system is off (through therelevant ASR OFF button) max pickup is ob-tained (“sprint" starting)
It is absolutely necessaryto turn off the engine and
then turn off the Selespeed systemkeeping the brake pedal pressed:ONLY release the pedal when thereconfigurable multifunction displayon the cluster has gone out.
WARNING
After a request to shiftgear with the car station-
ary, before pressing the accelera-tor pedal to make the car move,the driver must always check thedisplay to see that the gear en-gaged is the one required.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
115
WARNINGS
– With the car stopped and a gear en-gaged always keep the brake pedal presseduntil deciding to move off;
– during prolonged halts with the enginerunning it is advisable to keep the gearbox inneutral;
– when the car is parked facing uphill, donot use the moving off manoeuvre to keepthe car still; use the brake pedal and pressthe accelerator pedal only when deciding tomove off;
– use second gear only when more con-trol is needed for moving off manoeuvres atlow speed;
– if, in reverse gear, first gear is engagedor vice versa, shift gear only when the caris stopped completely and with the brakepedal pressed.
Though highly unadvisable, if when trav-elling downhill for some unexpected reasonthe car is set to neutral (N), when the en-gagement of a gear is requested the systemautomatically engages the best gear in re-lation to the speed of the car to allow thecorrect transmission of torque to the wheels.
When travelling downhill with a gear en-gaged and the accelerator released (if thevehicle is moving), beyond a pre-establishedspeed, the system engages the clutch au-tomatically to give the car adequate enginebraking.
For safety reasons the Selespeed systemactivates the buzzer when:
– clutch overheating occurs while the ve-hicle is being started; in this case it is nec-essary to “force” starting avoiding hesita-tion or, if the car is on a slope, release theaccelerator and use the brake pedalto stopthe car;
– the car moves in the opposite directionto the gear engaged, (e.g.: it moves for-wards with reverse gear engaged; in this sit-uation it is necessary to stop the car and en-gage the correct gear, keeping the brakepedal pressed.
Still due to safety reasons, with the car sta-tionary, the engine running and gear (1),(2) or (R) engaged, the system activatesthe buzzer and automatically shifts to neu-tral (N) when:
– no action is made on the acceleratorand/or brake pedals for at least 3 minutes;
– the brake is pressed for over 10 minutes;
– the driver’s door is opened and the ac-celerator and brake are not touched for atleast 1 second.
STOPPING THE CAR
To stop the car, simply release the accel-erator pedal and, if necessary press thebrake pedal.
Regardless of the gear engaged and theoperating mode activated (MANUAL orCITY) the system automatically disengagesthe clutch and shifts to a lower gear.
If deciding to move off again without hav-ing stopped the car completely, the mostsuitable ratio will be available for acceler-ating again.
Stopping the car the system automatical-ly engages first gear (1).
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
116 fig. 105
A0A0098m
fig. 104
A0A0097m
fig. 106
A0A0096m
OPERATION
The gearbox can work in two operatingmodes:
– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL),in which the driver directly decides when toshift gear.
– the second is completely automatic(CITY), in which the system decides di-rectly when to shift gear according to thetype of driving.
The CITY mode can be selected by press-ing the specific button CITY on the gearboxlever knob; when this mode is selected, theCITY sign appears on the display.
SEMIAUTOMATIC OPERATION(MANUAL)
In the operating mode, the reconfigurablemultifunction display on the cluster showsthe gear engaged.
In this operating mode, the decision tochange gear is left to the driver who decidesthe most appropriate moment.
The requests to change gear may takeplace through:
– the control lever on the centre console(A-fig. 104);
– steering wheel stalks (fig. 105),which can be operated only when the carspeed exceeds 2 km/h.
The MANUAL operating mode is setwhen, with the CITY mode selected, theCITY button(A-fig. 106) is pressedagain, excluding the previously selectedmode.
When changing gear it is not necessaryto release the accelerator pedal because theSelespeed system directly controls the en-gine in such a way as to:
– reduce and then increase engine torque;
– adapt the engine speed to the latestgear engaged.
When downshifting, the engine is accel-erated automatically to bring it to the speednecessary with the new gear ratio.
The neutral command (N) is accepted un-til the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h. Thereverse gear engagement command (R) isaccepted only if the vehicle is stationary.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
117
In the “MANUAL” operating mode thereare certain automatic/security devices whichsimplify driving:
– when slowing down the clutch is openedand the transmission ratio is automaticallyreduced to be ready for picking up again;otherwise, when the car is stopped, thegearbox will automatically be in firstgear(1);
– requests to change gear that would takethe engine to above maximum speed or be-low minimum speed are not accepted;
– if jamming occurs during gear engage-ment, the system firstly tries to engage thegear required again and, if it is still not pos-sible, it automatically engages the imme-diately higher one to avoid leaving the carinneutral.
IMPORTANT It is advisable to wait forthe end of a gear shifting operation beforerequesting another one, to avoid multiplerequests in rapid succession.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (CITY)
The automatic operating mode CITY is se-lected pressing button (A-fig. 106) at thebase of the gearshift lever.
In addition to the gear, the reconfigurablemultifunction display shows the word CITY(fig. 99).
The system decides directly when gearshift-ing according to the engine running speedand the driving style.
Releasing the accelerator pedal quickly, thesystem does not engage a higher gear in or-der to maintain an adequate level of enginebrake.
FAILURE WARNING
Failures of the Selespeed gearbox are shownby the t warning light (fig. 100) con-nected with the associated failure message,both shown on the display.
When the system is turned on (turning theignition key to MAR), the warning lightshould turn on glowing steadily for about4 seconds and then turn off.
If the warning light stays on it means thata fault to the gearbox has been detected; atthe same time a buzzer sounds intermit-tently for 4 seconds to attract the driver'sattention.
In the case of a fault to the gearshift con-trol lever, the system automatically engagesthe automatic operating mode CITY tomake it possible to reach the nearest AlfaRomeo Authorised Service to have the faulteliminated.
In the case of a fault to other gearbox com-ponents, the system only allows the en-gagement of certain gears: first gear (1),second gear (2) and reverse (R).
If warning light t andthe message appear on the
display, contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorised Services as soon as pos-sible to have the fault eliminated.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
118
BUZZER WARNINGS
The buzzer is activated when:
– reverse gear is engaged (R);
– the car is parked with the gearbox inneutral (N); signal that can be noted turn-ing the ignition key to STOP;
– clutch overheating occurs when movingoff;
– the car moves in the opposite directionto the gear engaged (e.g.: the car movesdownwards with reverse gear engaged);
– in the event of gearbox failure;
– the system has shifted automaticallyto neutral (N) when:
• an attempt is made to start the enginewith a gear engaged and the brake ped-al is not pressed completely;
• no action is made on the acceleratorand/or brake pedal for at least 3 min-utes;
• the brake is pressed for over 10 min-utes;
• the driver’s door is opened and no ac-tion is made on the accelerator andbrake for at least 1 second;
• a gearbox failure has been detected.
PARKING THE CAR
To park the car safely it is absolutelynecessary to engage first gear (1) or re-verse (R) and also the hand brake if theroad is on a slope.
Turning off the engine with the car on anuphill slope and a gear engaged, it is ab-solutely necessary to wait for the re-configurable multifunction display showingthe gear engaged to go off before releasingthe brake pedal, so that the clutch is com-pletely inserted.
If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and want-ing to engage a parking gear, the systemshould be activated and with the foot on thebrake pedal it is necessary to engage 1stgear (1) or (R).
TOWING THE CAR
IMPORTANT For towing the car followlocal regulations. Make sure that the gear-box is in neutral (N) (checking that the carmoves if pushed) and tow as for a car withnormal mechanical gearbox following the in-structions given in the chapter “In an emer-gency”.
Should it be impossible to set to neutral,do not tow the vehicle but contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services.
While towing the car donot start the engine.
WARNING
In the event of a gearboxfault to any component,
contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices as soon as possible tohave the system checked over.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
119
INTERIOR FITTINGS
GLOVEBOX
On the dashboard there is a glovebox withlid and light.
To open use handle (A-fig. 107).
When the glovebox is opened with the keyat MAR an inside courtesy light turns on(A-fig. 108).
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP, opening the glovebox, the light in-side can only be turned on for 15 minutes;after which the system turns it off to avoiddraining the battery.
GRAB HANDLES (fig. 109)
Suitable grab handles are fitted above thedoors and rear side windows.
fig. 107
A0A0108m
fig. 108
A0A0109m
fig. 109
A0A0110m
The fitting is completed by device (B), onthe lid, for inserting a pen or pencil.
Never travel with theglovebox open: the lid
might harm the passenger in theevent of an accident.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
120
FRONT ROOF LIGHT (fig. 110)
The roof light comprises two courtesy lightswith corresponding control switch.
IMPORTANT When a door is openedthe roof light turns on and timing of about3 minutes is activated automatically, afterwhich it goes off; closing the doors (withinthe 3 minutes) a second timing of about 7seconds is activated to allow vehicle start-ing.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP turning the roof light on is only pos-sible for 15 minutes; after which, the sys-tem turns it off to avoid draining the battery.
IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that both switches are in the cen-tral position. By so doing, the roof lights willturn off when the doors are closed. Forget-ting a door open the lights will turn off au-tomatically after a few seconds.
Unlocking the doors using the remote con-trol, the roof light turns on gradually and tim-ing is activated automatically for about 15seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.
The lights are turned off moving the igni-tion key to MAR (with the doors closed).
With switch (A) in the central position(1), both lights are turned on when a dooris opened.
Pressing switch (A) to the left (position0), the lights stay off (OFF position).
Pressing switch (A) to the right (position2) both lights stay on.
Switch (B) turns the lights on individual-ly.
Pressing switch (B) to the left (position0) the left light is turned on. Pressing theswitch to the right (position 2) the right lightis turned on.
With switch (B) in the central position (po-sition 1) the lights stay off.
fig. 110
A0A0111m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
121fig. 111
A0A0112m
fig. 112
A0A0432m
COURTESY LIGHTS (fig. 111)
On the back of the driver’s or passenger’ssun visor, opening the cover (A) the rooflights turn on (B) at the side of the courtesymirror, with the ignition key at MAR. Theselights allow use of the courtesy mirror whenthe light is poor.
IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP the lights can be activated only for15 minutes; after which the system turnsthem off to avoid draining the battery.
REAR ROOF LIGHT (fig. 112)
IMPORTANT When a door is opened,the roof light turns on and a timing of about3 minutes is activated, after which it turnsoff; closing the doors (within 3 minutes) asecond timing of about 7 seconds is acti-vated to allow the car to be started.
Unlocking the doors using the remote con-trol, the roof light turns on gradually and tim-ing is activated automatically for about 15seconds. Locking the doors with the remotecontrol the roof light turns off gradually.
The light turns off in any case turning theignition key to MAR (with the doorsclosed).
On the light there is a switch with threepositions.
When switch (A) is in the central posi-tion (0) the light turns on automaticallywhen a door is opened.
Moving the switch to the right (position 1)the light stays off.
Moving the switch to the left (position 2)the light stays on.IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP the roof light can be turned on foronly 15 minutes; after which it is turned offto avoid draining the battery.
IMPORTANT Before leaving the car,make sure that the switch (A) is in the cen-tral position (0), so that the roof light turnsoff when the doors are closed.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
122
PUDDLE LIGHTS (fig. 113)(for versions/markets where applicable)
The light (A) housed in the doors turns onwhen the associated door is opened, re-gardless of the position of the ignition key.
DETERRENT LED (fig. 114)
The led (A) on the instrument clustercomes into operation when the doors arelocked (ignition key at STOP or removed)and it remains in the “deterrence” condition,flashing with a red light until the next timethe doors are unlocked.
IMPORTANT If a door or the tailgateare not closed perfectly, the deterrent ledflashes at a higher frequency for 4 secondsand then flashes at normal frequency again.
FRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGARLIGHTER (fig. 115)
To use the ashtray open the lid (A).
To use the ashtray, with the key at MAR,press button (B); after a few seconds thebutton will return automatically to its initialposition and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
Remove the tray to empty and clean theashtray (C).
The position of the cigar lighter in relationto the ashtray and viceversa, may vary de-pending on the trim level.
fig. 113
A0A0243m
fig. 114
A0A0005m
fig. 115
A0A0433m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
123
REAR ASHTRAYS (fig. 116)
For the rear passengers there are two con-cealed ashtrays.
To use or remove pull in the direction ofthe arrow.
CD COMPARTMENT (fig. 117) (for versions/markets where applicable)
To open the CD compartment, press it asshown by the arrow.
CARD HOLDER RECESS ANDGLASS HOLDER (fig. 117/a)(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The interior fittings are completed by theremovable card holder recess(A) and glassholder (B) located at the centre of the dash-board. To use them, press as shown.
fig. 116
A0A0434m
Always ensure that thecigar lighter has turned off.
fig. 117/a
A0A0116m
fig. 117
A0A0515m
Do not use the ashtray aswaste paper basket: it
might set on fire in contact withcigarette stubs.
WARNING
The cigar lighter gets ex-tremely hot. Handle with
care and prevent its use by chil-dren: danger of fire and/or burn-ing.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
124
ODDMENT POCKETSON THE DOORS (fig. 118)
Each door has an oddments pocket (A).
ODDMENT RECESSES ONCENTRE CONSOLE (fig. 119)
On the centre console, at the side of thehand brake lever, depending on the versions,the following recesses are provided:
– oddment recess (A);
– magnetic card or toll ticket holder (B);
– pen or pencil holder (C);
– coin holder (D).
REAR ODDMENT POCKETS (fig. 120)
These are at the side of the rear seats inthe side trim (A).
fig. 120
A0A0435m
fig. 119
A0A0471m
fig. 118
A0A0117m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
125
CELL PHONEPROVISION
The car may be fitted with a provision forinstalling a cell phone.
The mobile phone provision consists in:
– Radio + cell phone dual-purpose anten-na;
– Connection and supply cables with spe-cific connector for connecting hands-free kit.
For the installation of acell phone and connectionto the provision in the car,
contact only Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services; this will guaranteefirst-rate results with no possibil-ity of any inconvenience that maycompromise the safety of the ve-hicle.
The voice kit should bepurchased by the customeras it must be compatible
with the customer’s phone.
SUN VISORS (fig. 121)
The visors can be directed at the front andside.
Behind the visors have a courtesy mirrorwith a light at the side (A). To use, openthe cover (B).
The lights allow use of the mirrors with dimlight.
fig. 121
A0A0121m
ACCESSORIESPURCHASEDBY THE OWNER
If after buying the car, you decide to installelectrical accessories that require a perma-nent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft, etc.)or accessories that in any case burden theelectric supply, contact Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services, whose qualified personnel,besides suggesting the most suitable devicesbelonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo, willalso evaluate the overall electric absorption,checking whether the vehicle’s electric sys-tem is able to withstand the load required,or whether it needs to be integrated with amore powerful battery.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
126
SLIDING FORWARDS/ BACKWARDS
With the ignition key at MAR turn thecontrol knob (A-fig. 122), in the direc-tion of the arrow, choosing one of the 6opening positions available.
To close the roof, take the control knob(A) to the centre position.
The sunroof is fitted with a sliding curtainbelow, which prevents sun radiation and isdrawn by hand using a catch.
The curtain is drawn by the roof when itopens and is pushed completely inside theroof panel when the sunroof is opened com-pletely. With the closing movement, it willcome out partially so that the hand catchis accessible (fig. 123).
fig. 122
A0A0123m
SUNROOFRADIOTRANSMITTERSAND CELL PHONES
Cell phones and other radio transmitter de-vices (CB for instance) may not be used in-side the car, unless a separate aerial is usedfitted outside the car.
Moreover the transmission and receptionefficiency of these devices may be down-graded by the screening effect of the carbody.
The use of cell phones, CBtransmitters or the like in-
side the passenger compartment(without outside aerial) producesradio frequency electromagneticfields which, amplified by the reso-nance effects inside the passengercompartment, may cause, besidespotential health hazards for thepassengers, also malfunctioning ofthe electronic systems with whichthe vehicle is fitted, such as enginecontrol unit, ABS/EBD control unitetc., which could adversely affectvehicle safety.
WARNING
Do not open the sunroofwith snow or ice on it:
damage may result.
WARNING
Open and close the sunroofonly with the vehicle sta-
tionary.
WARNING
Improper use of the sunroofcan be dangerous. Before
and while operating it, alwaysmake sure that the passengers arenot exposed to the risk of harmcaused either directly by the sun-roof in motion or by personal itemsdrawn or knocked by it.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
127fig. 123
A0A0125m
IMPORTANT If the car is fitted with asafety anti-crushing system, after locking thedoors, keeping the corresponding remotecontrol button pressed for about 2 seconds,triggers automatic closing of the roof andwindows. The button should be pressed un-til the roof and windows have completedtheir stroke; releasing the button sooner, thewindows and roof will stop in the positionthey are in at that moment.
When leaving the vehiclethe ignition key should be
removed to prevent the sunrooffrom being operated inadvertentlyand harming anyone remaining inthe vehicle.
WARNING On all versions, after releasing the doors,keeping the corresponding remote controlbutton pressed for about 2 seconds, obtainsopening of the roof and windows.
RAISING AT THE REAR
With the ignition key at MAR turn thecontrol knob (A-fig. 124), in the direc-tion of the arrow, choosing one of the threeopening positions available.
To close the roof, move the control knob(A) to the centre position.
EMERGENCY OPERATION
If the electrical control device does notwork the sunroof can be operated manual-ly as follows:
– apply leverage in the points shown bythe arrows and remove the plate (A-fig. 125);
– insert a special Allen wrench in the seat(B) with hexagon slot;
– then turn the wrench clockwise to openthe roof or counter-clockwise to close.
fig. 124
A0A0124m
fig. 125
A0A0126m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
128
OPENING FROM INSIDE (fig. 126)
Tailgate is released electrically and this canbe performed only when the ignition keyis in position MAR with car at a standstillor in STOP or PARK position for 3 min-utes without unlocking/locking one of thedoors.
To unlock the tailgate, press button (A)on the centre console panel.
Tailgate raising is facilitated by the gasshock springs.
OPENING WITH REMOTECONTROL (fig. 127)
The tailgate can be opened by remote con-trol from outside pressing the button (A),also when the electronic alarm is engaged.Opening of the tailgate is accompanied bya double flash of the direction indicators;closing is accompanied by a single flash.
If an electronic alarm is fitted, with theopening of the tailgate, the alarm systemswitches off volumetric protection and thetailgate control sensor, the system “beeps”twice (with the exception of certain mar-kets).
Closing the tailgate again, the control func-tions are restored, the system “beeps” twice(with the exception of certain markets).
The gas springs are cali-brated to ensure correcttailgate raising with the
weights foreseen by the manufac-turer. The arbitrary addition ofitems (such as spoilers, etc.) maycompromise the correct operationand safety of the actual tailgate.
fig. 127
A0A0131m
LUGGAGECOMPARTMENT
The tailgate can be opened:
from the outside of the car - by aremote control impulse;
from the inside of the door - by de-pressing the button (A-fig. 126).
IMPORTANT The non perfect hatchbackclosure is shown by the ´ symbol beingturned on as the same time as the dedicat-ed message on the re-configurable multi-function display.
fig. 126
A0A0129m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
129fig. 128
A0A0132m
TAILGATE CLOSING
To lock, push in correspondence with theAlfa Romeo badge to lower tailgate, untilyou feel the click of the lock.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTLIGHTING (fig. 128)
When the tailgate is opened the light turnson automatically (A) in the right-hand sideof the boot. Closing the tailgate, the lightturns off automatically.IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key to
STOP, opening the tailgate, turning on thelight will only be possible for 15 minutes;after which the system turns it off to avoiddraining the battery.
SECURING THE LOAD (fig. 130)
The loads carried may be secured strapshooked to the special rings (A) in the boot.
The rings also serve for fastening the lug-gage restrainer, if present (in any case avail-able c/o Alfa Romeo Authorised Services).
CAUTIONS FOR CARRYINGLUGGAGE
Travelling at night with a load in the bootit is necessary to adjust the height of the lowbeam headlights (see next paragraph“Headlights” in this chapter). For correct useof the aiming device, also make sure thatthe load does not exceed the values givenin the same paragraph.
fig. 130
A0A0133m
fig. 129
A0A0373m
EMERGENCY OPENING OF TAILGATE
To succeed in opening the tailgate from theinside, should the car battery be flat, or be-cause of a defect of the electric lock of thetailgate itself, proceed as follows (refer to“Extending the Luggage Compartment” inthe chapter “Getting to know your car”):
– remove rear headrests;
– tilt the rear seat cushions;
– tilt the backrests;
Operate on lever (A-fig. 129) as shown,to achieve the tailgate mechanical release,operating from the inside of the luggagecompartment.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
130 fig. 132
A0A0437m
BONNET
The bonnet opening lever is under the leftend of the dashboard.
To open:
– pull the lever (A-fig. 131) until thebonnet clicks open.
– press the safety lever (A-fig. 132)upwards.
– raise the bonnet.
IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided bytwo gas springs. Do not tamper with thesesprings and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.
fig. 131
A0A0436m
A heavy load that has notbeen secured may cause
serious harm to passengers.
WARNING
Do not load the boot abovethe permitted maximum
(see “Technical specifications”). Al-so make sure that the objects con-tained in the boot are well securedto prevent them from being thrownforward,causing harm to the pas-sangers.
WARNING
If you want to carry re-serve fuel in a can, follow
legal regulations, only using a cer-tified can, suitably fastened to theload securing eyelets. Even in thisway the risk of fire is increased inthe case of an accident.
WARNING
Do this only with the carstationary.
WARNING
DANGER-SERIOUS INJURY.When carrying out checks
or maintenance operations in theengine compartment, take specialcare not to bump the head on theraised bonnet.
WARNING
If checks are needed in theengine compartment, when
it is still hot, do not approach thefan: it might start working alsowith the ignition key removed.Wait for the engine to cool down.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
131
To close:
– lower the bonnet until approx. 20 cmfrom the engine compartment and then letit drop, ensuring that it is fully closed andnot just held in position by the safety catch.
If the bonnet does not close properly donot push it down but open it again and re-peat the above procedure.
Scarves, ties and other looseclothing might be pulled by
moving parts.
WARNING
For safety reasons thebonnet shall always be
perfectly closed when travelling.Always check for proper bonnetlocking. If the bonnet is left inad-vertently open, stop the car im-mediately and close the bonnet.
WARNING
ROOF RACKPROVISION
The front hooks are in points (A-fig. 133).
The rear hooks are located in the points (B)shown by the serigraph (▼) on the side rearwindows.
Follow the regulations inforce concerning maximumclearances.
IMPORTANT Closely follow the assem-bly instructions provided in the kit. Assem-bly must be carried out by skilled personnel.
Never exceed the maxi-mum permissible loads (see“Technical Specifications”
chapter).
fig. 133
A0A0232m
After a few kilometres,check that the fastening
screws are firmly tightened.
WARNING
Distribute the load evenlyand when driving, bear in
mind the increased sensitivity toside wind.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
132 fig. 135
A0A0199m
For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:
– position 0: one or two people occupy-ing the front seats
– position 1: five people;
– position 2: five people + load in theboot;
– position 3: driver + maximum permis-sible load all stowed in lug-gage compartment
COMPENSATION FOR TILT (fig. 134) (excluding versionswith Xenon headlights)
When the vehicle is loaded, the beam fromthe headlights is raised due to the back-wards tilt of the vehicle.
In this case the headlights must be ad-justed correctly.
To do this, use the rocker button (A), onthe plate at the side of the steering column:
– press the arrow on the button (A), thiswill increase by one position (eg.: 0 ➟ 1➟ 2 ➟ 3);
– press the arrow on the button (S), thiswill lower by one position (eg.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟1 ➟ 0);
The display (B), in the tachometer showsthe positions while adjustment is beingmade.
fig. 134
A0A0467m
HEADLIGHTS
The adjustment of the headlights is vital toyour safety and comfort and to that of oth-er road users.
The adjustment of the headlights is alsogoverned by precise regulations.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services tohave the headlights correctly adjusted.
IMPORTANT On the inside surface ofthe headlight there could appear a slightcoat of fogging; this does not show a defect,since it is a natural occurrence due to lowtemperature and to the degree of humidityin the air; it will soon disappear as soon asthe lights are turned on. The presence ofdrops inside the headlight shows water seep-age, refer to the Alfa Romeo Dealership.
Check beam aiming everytime the load carried
changes.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
133
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTABROAD (fig. 135)
The dipped-beam headlights are adjustedfor circulation in the country in which the ve-hicle is marketed. In countries with oppositecirculation, to avoid glaring oncoming vehi-cles it is necessary to cover the areas of theheadlight as shown below; this is done us-ing non-transparent sticker tape.
The illustration refers to passing from right-hand drive to left-hand drive.
GAS DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS(optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)
The gas (xenon) discharge headlights op-erate with a voltaic arc, in an ambient sat-urated with pressure xenon, instead of theglow filament.
The resulting illumination is sensibly high-er to that of conventional lamps, both forlight quality (clearer light) and for the widthand positioning of the illuminated area.
The advantages of better illumination canbe perceived (due to less eyesight fatigueand greater orientation capacity for the dri-ver, which in turn means higher driving safe-ty) especially in case of bad weather, fogand/or insufficient road signs, thanks to thebetter illumination of the side parts of thevisual field, normally obscured.
The large increase of the side part illumi-nation increases driving safety since it allowsthe driver to better see the other users onthe edge of the road (pedestrians, cyclistsand bikers).
The triggering of the voltaic arc requires avery high voltage, while subsequent powersupply can take place at a low voltage.
The headlights achieve their top luminosi-ty approx. 15 seconds after they are switchedon.
The intense light produced by this type ofheadlights requires the use of an automat-ic system to keep headlight trim constantand avoid dazzling the vehicles coming fromthe opposite direction in case of braking, ac-celeration or when carrying loads.
The electric mechanical system for auto-matically keeping the trim constant, makesunnecessary the device for compensatingthe headlight dip and the visual indicationof the position on the display.
Xenon lights have a very long life, there-fore breakdowns are unlikely.
If necessary, have the sys-tem checked and repaired
only by Alfa Romeo AuthorizedServices.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
134
ABS
The car is fitted with an ABS braking sys-tem, which prevents the wheels from lock-ing when braking, makes full use of the gripand within the limits of the grip available,keeps the car controllable also in emergencybraking.
When braking a slight pulsing accompa-nied by noise may be felt on the brake ped-al due to the action of the ABS system.
This should not be interpreted as a brak-ing malfunction. It is the signal to the driverthat the ABS has come into action: it is thewarning that the car is travelling at the lim-it of its grip and therefore the speed shouldbe adapted to the type of road.
The ABS system is an additional part of thebase braking system; in the event of a fail-ure it is disabled, leaving the braking sys-tem in the same conditions as a vehicle with-out ABS.
In the case of a failure, the anti-lock actionis no longer present, the braking capacity ofthe vehicle is not adversely affected at all.
If you have never previously used cars fit-ted with ABS, it is advisable to practice a lit-tle on a slippery surface, naturally in safe-ty conditions and in accordance with the lo-cal Highway Code you are also advised toread the following instructions carefully.
The advantage of the ABS over a conven-tional system is that it makes it possible toobtain the highest degree of handling alsowhen braking completely under limited gripconditions, preventing the wheels from lock-ing.
However, with the ABS do not expect thebraking distance to always shorten: for ex-ample, on soft surfaces like gravel or freshsnow or a slippery surface, the space mightincrease.
To better exploit the possibilities of the an-ti-lock system in the case of need, the ad-vice given below should be followed.
If the ABS cuts in it meansthat the limit of grip is be-
ing reached between the tyre andthe road surface: it is thereforenecessary to slow down to adaptdriving to the grip available.
WARNING
The ABS better exploits thegrip available, but cannot
increase it; caution is therefore nec-essary on slippery surfaces, with-out taking unnecessary risks.
WARNING
In the event of a systemfailure, with the turning on
of the > warning light on theinstrument cluster, have the carchecked immediately by Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services driving slow-ly, to be able to have the system re-stored to fully efficient conditions.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
135
Always take due car when braking onbends, even with the help of the ABS.
The most important advice of all, howev-er, is this:
Following these instruction you will be inthe best braking condition under all circum-stances.
IMPORTANT Cars fitted with ABS mayonly be fitted with the wheel rims, tyres andbrake linings of type and brand approved bythe Manufacturer.
The system is completed by the EBD (Elec-tronic Brake Distributor) which distributesthe braking action through the control unitand the ABS system sensors.
IMPORTANT If the battery is run downthe> and x warning lights might turnon when starting the engine and go off af-ter starting. This should not be consideredas a fault but as a warning that during start-ing the ABS is not active. The turning offof the warning lights ensures normal systemoperation.
When the ABS cuts in, andyou feel the pulsing on the
pedal, do not lighten the pressure,but keep the pedal firmly pressedwith no fear; this way you willstop in the least space possible,compatibly with the conditions ofthe road surface.
WARNING
The car is fitted with anelectronic braking distribu-
tor (EBD). If the > and x warn-ing lights turn on simultaneouslywith the engine running, this indi-cates an EBD system failure; in thiscase with sharp braking the rearwheels might lock too early, withthe possibility of skidding. Drivingextremely carefully, go to the near-est Alfa Romeo Authorised Serviceto have the system checked.
WARNINGThe turning on of only the> warning light with the
engine running normally indicates afault to the ABS system only. In thiscase the braking system is still ef-ficient, though without the aid ofthe anti-lock device. Under theseconditions performance of the EBDsystem may be reduced. In this casetoo, you areadvised to go immedi-ately to the nearest Alfa RomeoAuthorised Service to have the sys-tem checked over, driving in sucha way as to avoid sharp braking.
WARNING
If the low brake fluid lev-el x warning light turns
on, stop the car immediately andcontact the nearest Alfa RomeoAuthorised Service. Any loss offluid from the hydraulic systemwill negatively affect the opera-tion of the braking system be it ofthe conventional type or of thetype with ABS.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
136
VDC SYSTEM (Vehicle Dynamics Control)
The VDC is an electronic system that con-trols vehicle stability, intervening on the dri-ving torque and braking the wheels in a dif-ferentiated manner, in the lack of grip, ithelps to bring the car back to the correctdirection.
When travelling the car is subjected to lat-eral and longitudinal forces which can becontrolled by the driver as long as the tyresoffer adequate roadholding; when this fallsbelow the minimum level, the car beginsto divert from the course required by the dri-ver.
Especially when travelling on an unevensurface (such as paving, or due to the pres-ence of water, ice or soil), changes in speed(acceleration or braking) and/or course(bends or the need to avoid obstacles) maycause the tyres to lose grip.
When the sensors detect the conditionsthat would lead to skidding, the VDC systemintervenes on the engine and on the brakesproducing a stabilising torque.
HOW THE VDC SYSTEM WORKS
The VDC system is engaged automatical-ly when the car is started and cannot beswitched off.
The basic components of the VDC systemare:
– an electronic control unit that process-es the signals received from the various sen-sors and brings about the most appropriatestrategy;
– a sensor that detects the position of thesteering wheel;
– four sensors that detect the turningspeed of each wheel;
– a sensor that detects rotation of the cararound its vertical axis;
– a sensor that detects lateral acceleration(centrifugal force).
The heart of the VDC system is the VDCcontrol unit, which with the data suppliedby the sensors installed on the car calculatesthe centrifugal forces generated when thecar is cornering. The yawing sensor, whichoriginates from the aeronautical industry, de-tects the rotations of the car around its ownvertical axis. The centrifugal forces gener-ated when the car is cornering are detect-ed by a highly sensitive lateral accelerationsensor.
The VDC system helps the driver to keepthe car under control in the event of a lossof tyre grip.
The forced induced by the VDC system tocontrol the loss of vehicle stability alwaysdepend on the grip between the tyre andthe road surface.
The performance of thesystem, in terms of active
safety should not induce the driverto take pointless and unnecessaryrisks. The style of driving must inany case always be adapted to theconditions of the road surface, vis-ibility and traffic. The responsibil-ity for road safety is always andin any case the driver’s.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
137
The stabilising action of the VDC system isbased on the calculations of the system elec-tronic control unit, which processes the sig-nals received from the steering wheel rota-tion sensor, acceleration sensor and rotationspeed sensor of ech wheel.These signals al-low the control unit to recognise the ma-noeuvre the driver intends to do when thesteering wheel is turned.
The control unit processes the informationreceived from the sensors and therefore ableto know the position of the car instant by in-stant and compare it with the course the dri-ver would like to follow. In the event of adiscrepancy, in a fraction of a second thecontrol unit chooses and commands themost suitable intervention to bring the carimmediately back to the required course:braking one or more wheels at different in-tensity and, if necessary, reducing the pow-er transmitted by the engine.
The corrective actions are modified andcontrolled continuously in seeking the courserequired by the driver.
The action of the VDC system considerablyenhances the active safety of the car in verycritical situations and it is particularly help-ful when the grip conditions of the road sur-face change.
CUTTING IN OF THE VDC SYSTEM
The cutting in of the VDC system is indi-cated by the flashing of the áwarning lighton the instrument cluster, to inform the dri-ver that the car is in critical conditions of sta-bility and grip.
VDC system failure warning
In the event of a failure the VDC systemdisengages automatically and the á warn-ing light on the instrument cluster turns onglowing steadily, together with the messageon the reconfigurable multifunction display.
In the event of a VDC system failure thecar behaves like a vehicle not fitted with thissystem: in any case it is advisable to con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soonas possible.
For the VDC system towork correctly, the tyres
must be of the same brand andtype on all wheels, in perfect con-ditions and above all of the speci-fied type, brand and size.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
138
SWITCHING ON THE ASR FUNCTION
The ASR function switches on automati-cally each time the engine is started.
When travelling the device can be switchedoff and on again pressing switch (A-fig. 136) on the centre console.
Function disconnection is shown by the rel-evant led on the switch itself being turnedon and by the dedicated message displayedon the re-configurable multifunction display.
Should the function be disconnected whenrunning, it will automatically be activatedagain at the next ignition and the re-con-figurable multifunction display will informuser about this condition by displaying a ded-icated message.
fig. 136
A0A0140m
ASR SYSTEM (Antislip Regulation)
The ASR function controls the vehicle dri-ve and cuts in automatically every time oneor both driving wheels slip.
In slipping conditions, two different controlsystems are activated:
1) if slipping involves both driving wheels,being caused by excessive power transmit-ted, the ASR device cuts in reducing the pow-er transmitted by the engine.
2) if slipping involves only one drivingwheel, the ASR system cuts in automatical-ly braking the wheel that is slipping, withan effect similar to that of a self-locking dif-ferential.
The action of the ASR is particularly help-ful in the following circumstances:
– slipping of the inner wheel on a bend,due to the effect of dynamic load changesor excessive acceleration.
– too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditions ofthe road surface.
– acceleration on slippery, snowy or frozensurfaces.
– in the case of loss of grip on a wet sur-face (aquaplaning).
The performance of thesystem in terms of active
safety should not induce the driverto take pointless and unnecessaryrisks. The style of driving must inany case be adapted to the condi-tions of the road surface, visibili-ty and traffic. Road safety is al-ways the driver’s responsibility.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
139
IMPORTANT When travelling on snowwith snow chains, it may be helpful to turnthe ASR device off: in fact, in these condi-tions, slipping of the driving wheels whenmoving off makes it possible to obtain bet-ter drive.
ASR system failure warning
Should a defect arise, the ASR system isautomatically disconnected and the re-con-figurable multifunction display informs userabout this condition by displaying a dedi-cated message.
In the event of an ASR system operatingfailure, the car behaves in the same wayas a car that is not fitted with this system:in any case, it is advisable to contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services as soon as pos-sible.
EOBD SYSTEM
The EOBD system (European On Board Di-agnosis) installed on the car meets Directive98/69/CE (EURO 3).
This system allows continuous diagnosisof the components on the car correlated withemissions; it also alerts the driver, by turn-ing on the warning light U (on some ver-sions together with the message + symbolon the reconfigurable multifunction display)on the instrument panel when these com-ponents are no longer in peak conditions.
The objective is:
– to keep system efficiency under control;
– warn when a fault causes emission lev-els to increase over the threshold establishedby European law;
– warn of the need to replace deteriorat-ed components.
The system also has a diagnostic connec-tor that can be interfaced with appropriatetools, which makes it possible to read theerror codes stored in the control unit, to-gether with a series of specific parametersfor engine operation and diagnosis.
If, turning the ignition keyto MAR, the warning lightU does not turn on or if,
while travelling it turns on glow-ing steadily or flashing togetherwith the message + symbol on thereconfigurable multifunction dis-play, contact Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services as soon as possible.
IMPORTANT After eliminating the in-convenience, to check the system com-pletely, Alfa Romeo Authorised Services areobliged to run a bench test and, if necessaryroad tests which may also call for a long jour-ney.
For correct operation of theASR system the tyres must
absolutely be of the same brandand type on all wheels, in perfectconditions and, above all, of thespecified type, brand and size.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
140
RADIO PRESETTINGSYSTEM(for versions/markets whereapplicable)
The car, if not delivered with sound sys-tem, is fitted with a glove compartment onthe instrument panel (fig. 136a).
Sound system presetting system includesthe following:
– sound system power cables;
– front and rear speaker power cables;
– aerial power cable;
– sound system housing;
– aerial on car roof.
The sound system shall be installed in theproper housing occupied by the glove com-partment that can be removed by pressingthe two retaining tabs fitted in the glovecompartment: here are the power cables.
If after buying the car youwant to install the soundsystem, contact first Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services whosequalified personnel, in addition tosuggesting the most suitable de-vices, will evaluate the overallelectric absorption to safeguard thebattery. Excessive loadless ab-sorption could damage the batteryand lose warranty.
The wiring diagram is the following (fig.136b):
Connector A
A1 N.C.
A2 N.C.
A3 N.C.
A4 + 30 (battery-powered)
A5 Aerial power supply
A6 Light
A7 + 15 (key-powered)
A8 Ground
Connector B
B1 RH rear speaker
B2 RH rear speaker
B3 RH front speaker
B4 RH front speaker
B5 LH front speaker
B6 LH front speaker
B7 LH rear speaker
B8 LH rear speaker
fig. 136a
A0A0715m
fig. 136b
A0A0709m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
141
ADVICE
Road safety
You are advised to learn how to use thevarious radio functions (e.g. storing stations)before starting to drive.
Reception conditions
Reception conditions change constantlywhen driving. Reception may be disturbedby the presence of mountains, buildings orbridges particularly when far away from thestation being listened to.
IMPORTANT When receiving traffic in-formation, the volume may be higher thannormal.
Care and maintenanceThe radio structure ensures long operation
with no need for particular maintenance.In the event of a fault, contact AuthorisedAlfa Romeo Services.
To clean the front panel only use a soft,antistatic cloth. Cleaning and polishing prod-ucts might spoil the surface.
Compact Disc
Remember that dirt, marks or distortion onCompact Discs can cause skipping and poorsound quality. For top performance condi-tions, we give the following advice:
– Only use Compact Discs which have thefollowing brand:
– Carefully clean all Compact Disc of fin-gerprints and dust using a soft cloth. Sup-port Compact Discs from the outer circum-ference and clean from the centre outwards.
INTRODUCTION
The fixed radio, fitted with Compact Discplayer and parametric sound equaliser hasbeen designed in accordance with the spe-cific features of the passenger compartment,with a personalised design that blends withthe style of the dashboard.
The radio is installed in a user-friendly po-sition for the driver and passenger and thegraphics on the front panel make locationof the controls quick, facilitating use.
The CD-Changer for 10 discs, if present,is housed in the right-hand side of the boot.
To increase safety against theft, the set is fit-ted with a protection system that allows theuse of it only on the car on which it was orig-inally fitted.
Below you will find the instructions for use,which you are advised to read through care-fully. The instructions also contain the pro-cedure for controlling the CD-Changerthrough the radio. For the instructions foruse of the CD-Changer refer to the specificmanual.
RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC PLAYER
Too high a volume whendriving can put the driver’s
life at risk and that of other peo-ple. Therefore the volume shouldalways be adjusted in such a waythat it is always possible to hearthe noises of the surrounding en-vironment (e.g. horns, ambulance,police sirens, etc.).
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
142
– Never use chemical products for clean-ing (e.g. spray cans, antistatics or thinners)as they might damage the surface of Com-pact Discs.– After use, put Compact Discsback in their container, to avoid marks orscratches that may cause skipping whenplaying.
– Do not expose Compact Discs to directsunlight, high temperatures or damp for pro-longed lengths of time to prevent them frombending.
– Do not stick labels or write on the record-ed surface of Compact Discs with pens orpencils.
To remove a Compact Disc from its con-tainer, press the centre and raise the disccarefully, holding it by the outer circumfer-ence.
Always hold Compact Discs by the outercircumference. Never touch the surface.
To remove fingerprints and dust, use a softcloth starting from the centre of the Com-pact Disc outwards.
IMPORTANT If the CD is copy-protect-ed, the system may need few seconds be-fore starting to play it.
Notes on Compact Discs
Do not stick labels on the surface of theCompact Disc or write on the surface withpens or pencils.
Proper way to holdthe compact disc
Removing the disc
No
Ball-point pen
Roughness
New discs may be rough around the edges.When these discs are used, the player mightnot work or the sound might skip. To removethe roughness from the edge of the disc usea ball-point pen etc.
IMPORTANT Do not use the protectivesheets for CD in commerce or discs with sta-bilisers, etc. as they might get stuck in theinternal mechanism and damage the disc.
No
No
Do not use solvents like stain removers,antistatic sprays or thinners in commerce forcleaning Compact Discs.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
143
Do not use highly scratched, cracked, ordistorted discs, etc. The use of these discswill involve malfunctioning or damage to theplayer.
GENERAL
The set possesses the following functions:
Radio section
– PLL tuning with FM/MW/LW frequen-cy bands
– RDS (Radio Data System) with TA (traf-fic information) - PTY (Program Type) - EON(Enhanced Other Network) - REG (RegionalProgrammes) functions
– Alternative frequency search selection inRDS mode (AF function)
– Emergency alarm reception provision
– Automatic/manual station tuning
– Manual storage of 30 stations:18 in theFM band FM (6 in FM1, 6 in FM2, 6 inFMT), 6 in the MW band MW and 6 in theLW band
– Automatic storage (Autostore function)of 6 stations in FMT band
– SENS DX/LO function (sensitivity ad-justing in searching radio stations)
– Scan Function (scanning stored stations)
– Automatic Stereo/Mono switching.
Compact Disc Section
– Disc select (disc no.)
– Track select (forward/backward)
– Fast forward/backward
– Repeat function (repetition of last piece)
– Scan Function (scanning the tracks onthe Compact Disc)
– Mix Function (random playing)
– TPM Function (storing CD track playingsequence)
– CLR Function (clearing CD track stor-age).
No
No
Do not expose Compact Discs to direct sun-light or any source of heat.
To obtain the best sound quality, use orig-inal CD supports. Correct operation is not en-sured if not correctly written CD-R/RW sup-ports and/or with capacity higher than 650MB are used.
For installation and con-nection of the CD-Changerapply only to Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
144
Sound section
– Pause Function
– Loudness Function (except versions withBOSE HI-FI system)
– 7 band graphic equalizer
– Separate bass/treble adjustment
– Right/left and front/rear channel bal-ancing.
CAUTIONS
If it is very cold inside the car and the CDplayer is used a little after turning the heateron, a film of damp may form on the Com-pact Disc or on the player optics and thesound may not be perfect. In this case donot use the CD player for at least an hour,so that the condensation dissolves natural-ly and normal operation is resumed.
Driving on rough roads with heavy vibra-tions may cause skipping when the CD play-er is working.
PROTECTION AGAINST THEFT
The radio is fitted with an antitheft pro-tection system based on the exchange of in-formation between the radio and the elec-tronic control unit (Body Computer) installedon the car. This system warrants the high-est level of security and prevents entry ofthe secret code every time the radio sup-ply is disconnected.
After every re-connection an automaticcheck procedure is performed during whichthe display shows the wording “CAN-CHECK” for about one second. If the resultof the check is positive, the set starts work-ing, whereas if the comparison codes arenot the same or if the radio is connected forthe first time to the vehicle electric system,the device informs the user of the need toenter the secret code according to the pro-cedure described in the following paragraph.
During the code entry procedure the dis-play shows the word “CODE”. The set willnot work until the correct code is entered
This way the protection system makes theradio unusable after removal from the dash-board in the case of theft.
On multimedia CDs in addi-tion to sound tracks also
data tracks are recorded. Playingone of these CDs may cause rustlingand such a volume as to compro-mise road safety, as well as caus-ing damage to the final stages andspeakers.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
145
Entering the secret code
Entry of the secret code is required to al-low the radio to work after the first con-nection to the vehicle electric system or toa different Body Computer than the originalone.
Connecting the radio to the car supply, thedisplay will show the wording “CODE” forabout 2 seconds, followed by four dashes“- - - -”.
The secret code comprises four figures from1 to 6, each corresponding to one of thedashes.
To enter the first digit of the code, pressthe corresponding key of the preset stations(from 1 to 6). Enter the other code digits inthe same way.
If the four figures are not entered within20 seconds, te display shows the word“CODE” for 2 seconds and then four dash-es “- - - -”. This is not to be consideredas an incorrect code entry.
After entering the fourth digit (within 20seconds), the radio starts to work.
If a wrong code is entered, the radiosounds a “beep”, the display shows theword “CODE” for 2 seconds and then fourdashes “- - - -” to inform the user that itis necessary to enter the correct code.
Every time the user enters a wrong code,the waiting time increases gradually (1 min,2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 16 min, 30 min, 1h,2h, 4h, 8h, 16h, 24h) until reaching a max-imum of 24 hours.
The waiting time will be shown on the dis-play with the word “WAIT”. When thisgoes off it is possible to start the new codeentry procedure.
Code Card
This is the document that certifies posses-sion of the radio. The Code Card containsthe radio model, serial number and secretcode.
IMPORTANT Keep the Code Card care-fully to be able to give the related data tothe competent authorities in the event oftheft.
GLOSSARY
AF (Alternative frequency)
Function that allows the radio to stay tunedon the FM station selected also passingthrough areas served by transmitters withdifferent frequencies.
In fact the RDS system keeps the intensi-ty and quality of the signal received undercontrol, automatically switching tuning onthe frequency of the transmitter that is send-ing the strongest signal.
Autostore/Travelstore
Function with which it is possible to auto-matically store radio stations.
Balance (Channel balancing)
Function with which it is possible to ap-propriately adjust the sound from the rightor left speakers
Bass
This function adjusts the bass tones.
CD-Changer
Multiple Compact Disc player.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
146
CLR (Clear)
Function with which it is possible to clearall the tracks of the CD stored with the TPMfunction.
EON (Enhanced Other Network)
Function that allows the radio to tune au-tomatically on a different radio station thanthe one being listed to which broadcasts traf-fic information.
Fader
Function with which it is possible to ap-propriately adjust the sound from the frontor rear speakers.
Hicut (Treble reduction)
Function with which it is possible to reducethe treble tones, in accordance with the sig-nal transmitted.
Distant/Local (Sens Dx/Loc)
These are the two levels of reception sen-sitivity.
1) Distant (maximum sensitivity), whichmakes it possible to tune all the stations thatcan be received.
2) Local (minimum sensitivity), whichmakes it possible to tune only those stationswith sufficiently strong signals, such as forexample local stations.
Loudness
A function that automatically emphasisesthe bass and treble tones when listening, atlow level. It is cut off with the volume setto the maximum.
Mix
This function is used to randomly select aCompact Disc among those present in theloader and all the tracks on this CompactDisc are played in random sequence.
MSS(Searching previous/next track)
With this function it is possible to listen tothe next or previous track on the cassette.
Mute
Function which, if activated, for examplein the presence of a cell phone in the car,brings the volume to zero when a phone callis being made/received.
Presettings
Number of radio stations that can be storedmanually or automatically.
PTY (Program Type)
This function allows the presetting of a cat-egory of programmes such as for instance,news bulletins, music, sport, etc. The set au-tomatically gives priority to the type of pro-gramme selected when transmission starts,interrupting the one in progress.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
147
RDS (Radio Data System)
This is a radiophonic information systemwhich uses the 57 kHz subcarrier of normalFM broadcasts.
With this function it is possible to receivedifferent types of information such as traf-fic bulletins and station names and to au-tomatically tune to a station with thestrongest signal that is broadcasting thesame programme.
REG (Regional transmissionreception function)
Function with which it is possible to tuneonly to local (regional) stations.
Repeat
Function with which it is possible to con-tinuously listen to the last track played onthe Compact Disc.
Scan
Function with which it is possible to listenfor a few seconds to all the radio stationsstored, or the beginning of all the tracks con-tained on the Compact Disc.
Scrolling
Function with which it is possible to receivedifferent programmes in the same network(in the FM band only).
PLL Tuning
Digital tuning with Phase Lock Loop circuitto obtain the best radio channel tuning.
Soft Mute
Function that gradually highers and low-ers the volume when Mute is turned on oroff.
Sound Flavour
A function that sets the best equalizing pos-sible depending on the type of music se-lected (Classic, Jazz, Rock, etc).
SVC
Function that automatically adjusts the lev-el of the volume to the speed of the car tomaintain the ratio with the noise level in thepassenger compartment.
TA (Traffic information)
Function with which it is possible to receivethe traffic information broadcast by the sta-tions enabled, also when tuned to anotherstation or listening to a cassette, CD, or dur-ing a phone call.
TPM (Track Program Memory)
Function with which it is possible to storethe sequence for playing the tracks of a CD,to be able to play them later in the sequenceset.
Treble
This adjusts the treble tones.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
148
CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL(fig. 137)
1. AF-TA Function select button:– AF (alternative frequencies)– TA (traffic information)
2. PTY Function select button:– RDS PTY (type of RDS pro-
gramme)– Choice of the subject of
PTY transmission in EONmode
3. Compact Disc slot
4. ¯¯ Selected sound and menu ad-justment and manual stationsearch button
5. ˚ Compact Disc eject button
6. ▲ Sound and Menu select but-ton and automatic stationsearch
7. ˙˙ Selected Sound and Menufunction adjustment and man-ual station search
8. ▼ Sound and Menu select but-ton and automatic stationsearch
9. MENU-PS Menu and Scan func-tion button (hearingstored stations in se-quence)
10. 6 Function select button:– Call station no. 6– Store station no. 6
fig. 137 A0A0230m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
149
11. 5-MIX Function select button:– Call station no. 5– Store station no. 5– Random CD track playing
12. 4-RPT Function select button:– Call station no. 4– Store station no. 4– Continuous CD track play-
ing
13. BN-AS Radio frequency range selectfunction (FM1, FM2, FMT,MW, LW) - Autostore
14. SRC-SC Operating mode select but-ton Radio - Compact Disc -CD-Changer and Scan func-tion (hearing stations in se-quence)
15. 3-II Function select button:– Call station no. 3– Store station no. 3– CD playing pause
16. 2-CLR Function select button:– Call station no. 2– Store station no. 2– CLR function (CD track stor-
age clearing)
17. 1-TPMFunction select button:– Call station no. 1– Store station no. 1– TPM function (storing CD
playing sequence)
18. AUD-LD Sound function select but-ton: bass tones, trebletones, right/left andfront/rear balancing andLoudness (except versionswith BOSE HI-FI system)
19. VOL- Volume lowering button
20. ON-z Function select button:– Set on/off– Mute on/off
21. VOL+ Volume highering button
CONTROLS ON THE STEERINGWHEEL (fig. 138)
The main radio function controls are re-peated on the steering wheel, to allow eas-ier control.
1. Volume increase button
2. Volume decrease button
3. Mute button
4. Radio frequency range select button(FM1, FM2, FMT, MW, LW) and avail-able sources (Radio - Compact Disc - CD-Changer)
5. Multifunction button:– Radio: call preset stations (from 1 to
6)– Compact Disc player: select next piece
fig. 138
A0A0100m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
150
6. Multifunction button:– Radio: call preset stations (from 6 to
1)– Compact Disc player: select previous
track.
Volume adjustment and Mutebuttons
The buttons for volume adjustment (1) e(2) and for turning Mute on/off (3) workin the same way as the corresponding but-tons on the radio.
Radio frequency and soundsource select button
To cyclically select the radio frequenciesand sound sources, briefly and repeatedlypress button (4).
The frequencies/sources available are:FMI, FMII, FMT, MW, LW, CD*, CDC**.
(*) Only if the Compact Disc is inserted
(**) Only if the CD-Changer is connected
Multifunction buttons (5) and (6)
Multifunction buttons (5) and (6) call thepreset radio stations, or select the next/pre-vious track when listening to a CompactDisc.
Press button (5) to select stations from1 to 6 or to listen to the next track on a CD.
Press button (6) to select stations from6 to 1 or to listen to the previous track ona CD.
FUNCTIONS ANDADJUSTMENTS (fig. 137)
Switching on
The set is turned on keeping the “ON”button pressed (20). If the radio was onbefore the engine was turned off, it will turnon again automatically the next time the en-gine is started.
If the radio is turned on with the ignitionkey at STOP, it will turn off automaticallyafter about 20 minutes.
With the ignition key at MAR the “ON”button is always lit to facilitate turning onthe radio.
When the radio is turned on again it willresume with the same settings that wereworking before turning off, with the excep-tion of the volume which, if it was set toabove 20, it is activated at 20.
Turning the radio off
To turn off keep the “ON”button (20)pressed again
If the ignition key is turned to STOP whenthe radio is on, it will turn off automatical-ly and turn on again the next time the keyis turned to MAR.
Selecting the Radio/CompactDisc/CD-Changer functions
Briefly and repeatedly pressing the “SRC”button (14) it is possible to select the fol-lowing functions in sequence:
– TUNER (Radio)
– CD (only if the Compact Disc is inserted)
– CHANGER (only if the CD-Changer is con-nected).
After each change of the sound source, forabout 2.5 seconds, the display shows thefunction selected: TUNER (Radio), CD(Compact Disc), CHANGER (CD-Changer).
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
151
The functions that cannot be selected (e.g.“CD” when the Compact Disc is not insert-ed) are disabled automatically. If the Com-pact Disc is not inserted and the CD-Chang-er is not connected, pressing the “SRC” but-ton (14) for about 2.5 seconds the displaywill show only “NO CD”.
IMPORTANT When listening to the ra-dio with a Compact Disc inserted and theCD-Changer connected, pressing the “SRC”button (14) will select the last function usedbetween Compact Disc and CD-Changer.
Pause function
If while listening to a Compact Disc anotherfunction is selected (e.g. the radio), playingis stopped and when the Compact Disc modeis resumed. it starts again from the pointin which it was stopped.
If while listening to the radio another func-tion is selected, when the Radio mode isresumed, it is tuned to the last station se-lected.
Volume adjustment
Press button “VOL+” (21) to higher thevolume or “VOL-” (19) to lower it.
Pressing the button briefly the change isgradual by steps. Pressing longer, thechange is fast. For a few seconds the dis-play shows the wording “VOL” and the vol-ume level (from 0 to 66).
If the volume level is changed during thebroadcast of a traffic bulletin or during useof the phone (if the voice feature is in-stalled), the new setting is maintained on-ly until the end of the bulletin or phone call.
Volume changing with speed
The SVC function makes it possible to au-tomatically adapt the volume level to thespeed of the car, increasing it as the speedincreases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.
To activate the SVC function briefly press(less than 1 second) the “MENU” button(9), then use buttons “▲” (6) or “▼” (8)to scroll the menu functions stopping on theSVC function and buttons “˙ ”̇ (7) or“¯¯” (4) to turn the function on or off se-lecting respectively “SVC ON” or “SVCOFF”.
This function can be turned on or off in allthe operating modes of the device (Ra-dio/Compact Disc/CD-Changer).
Mute function (turning off thevolume completely)
To turn on the Mute function briefly press(less than 1 second) the “z” button (20).The volume will lower gradually (Soft Mutefunction) and the display will show“MUTE”.
To turn the Mute function off, briefly pressthe “z” button again (20). The volumewill increase gradually (Soft Mute function)returning to the value set before using theMute function.
The Mute function is also turned off press-ing one of the volume adjustment buttons“VOL+” (21) or “VOL-” (19): in thiscase the volume is changed directly.
With the Mute function on, all the otherfunctions can be used and if a traffic bul-letin arrives with the TA function on or anemergency alarm is received, the messageignores the Mute function.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
152
Soft Mute function
When the Mute function is turned on oroff, the volume lowers or increases gradu-ally (Soft Mute function). The Soft Mutefunction is also activated when one of thesix presetting buttons, the “BN” button(13) or “ON” button (20) is pressed.
Tone adjustment
Proceed as follows:
– briefly and repeatedly press the “AUD”button (18) until the display shows thewording “BASS” or “TREBLE” (Bass orTreble select function)
– press “▲” (6) to increase the bassesor trebles or “▼” (8) to lower them.
Pressing the buttons briefly, the changeis gradual by steps. Pressing them longer,the change is fast.
For a few seconds the display shows thelevels of the basses/trebles (from -6 to +6).
After about 5 seconds from the last ad-justment the display returns to the main ra-dio screen.
Balance adjustment
Proceed as follows:
– briefly and repeatedly press the “AUD”button (18) until the display shows thewording “BALANCE” (Balance functionselect)
– press “▲” (6) to increase the soundfrom the right speakers or “▼” (8) to in-crease the sound from the left speakers.
Pressing the buttons briefly, the changeis gradual by steps. Pressing them longer,the change is fast. For a few seconds thedisplay shows the balancing levels from R+9to L+9 (“R” = right, “L” = left). Afterabout 5 seconds from the last adjustment,the display returns to the main radio screen.
Fader adjustment
Proceed as follows:
– briefly and repeatedly press the “AUD”button (18) until the display shows thewording “FADER” (Fader select function)
– press “▲” (6) to increase the soundfrom the rear speakers or “▼” (8) to in-crease the sound from the front speakers.
Pressing the buttons briefly the change isgradual by steps. Pressing them longer, thechange is fast. For a few seconds the dis-play shows the fader levels from R+9 toF+9 (“R” = rear, “F” = front).
After about 5 seconds from the last ad-justment the display returns to the main ra-dio screen.
Loudness Function (except versions with BOSE HI-FI system)
The Loudness function improves the soundvolume when listening at low level, in-creasing the basses and trebles. It is cut offwhen the volume is set to maximum. Toswitch the function on/off keep the “AUD”(18) pressed until hearing the “beep”. Thefunction condition (on or off) is shown onthe display for a few seconds by “LOUDON” or “LOUD OFF”.
On versions with BOSE HI-FI system theLoudness function is activated automatical-ly by the amplifier.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
153
TELEPHONE PROVISION (fig. 137)
If the voice kit is installed on the car, whena phone call is received the radio sound isconnected to the phone input. The telephonesound is heard with a fixed volume, but itcan be adjusted during the conversation us-ing “VOL+” (21) to higher the volume or“VOL-” (19) to lower it.
The fixed telephone volume can be ad-justed through the “PHONE” function ofthe menu (see“MENU” paragraph).
The only buttons active during phone callsare:
– “VOL+” (21), “VOL-” (19): forvolume adjustment
– “ON” (20): turning the radio on/off
– “AF-TA” (1): traffic information.
While the sound is off for a phone call, thedisplay shows the word “PHONE”.
The sound of the phone call will be inter-rupted in the case of transmission of a traf-fic bulletin or a PTY31 announcement; ifwishing to interrupt the bulletin press the“AF-TA” button (1).
RADIO (fig. 137)
When the set is turned on the last functionselected before turning off is played (Radio,Compact Disc or CD-Changer).
To select the Radio function while listeningto a Compact Disc, briefly and repeatedlypress the “SRC” button (14) until thisfunction is selected.
Selecting the frequency band
If in the Radio mode, briefly and repeat-edly press the “BN” button (13) to selectthe required reception band.
Every time the button is pressed the fol-lowing bands are selected in sequence“FM1”, “FM2”, “FMT”, “MW” and“LW” shown by the respective wording onthe display.
The FM band is divided into section: FM1,FM2 and FMT.
The FMT reception band is reserved to thestations stored automatically with the Au-tostore function.
The radio is always ready to receive sta-tions in the RDS Mode (Radio Data System).
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
154
Presetting buttons
The buttons with the symbols 1 to 6(“17”, “16”, “15”, “12”, “11”,“10”) make it possible to choose the fol-lowing presettings:
– 18 in the FM band (6 in FM1, 6 inFM2, 6 in FMT)
– 6 in the MW band
– 6 in the LW band
– 6 types of PTY programming (only inthe FM mode when PTY is selected).
To call a preset station, choose the requiredfrequency band and then press briefly (lessthan 1 second) the corresponding preset but-ton (from 1 to 6). For a few seconds thedisplay will show the number of the stationpreset and the related frequency beforeshowing the frequency band and the nameof the RDS station.
Storing the last station heard
The radio automatically keeps in storagethe last station heard for each receptionband, which is then tuned when the radio isturned on or the reception band is changed.
Automatic tuning
Briefly press (less than 1 second) “▲”(6) or “▼” (8) to start automaticallysearching the tuning for the next station thatit is possible to receive in the direction cho-sen.
if “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) is pressed forlonger (over 1 second) quick searchingtakes place: upon having tuned in to the firstwell receivable station, the tuner stops forabout 1 second (in Mute) before quicksearching continues. When the button is re-leased, the tuner stops on the next receiv-able station.
If the TA function is on (traffic information),the tuner only searches stations which broad-cast traffic bulletins.
If the PTY function is on, the tuner onlysearches PTY stations. When searching thedisplay alternatively shows the type of pro-gramme and the word “SEARCH”.
If the station on which the tuner stops isone of the stations stored with the presetbuttons, the display will show the presettingnumber for a few seconds.
Manual tuning
This allows manual station searching in thechosen band.
– Select the band with the “BN” button(13): FM1, FM2, FMT, MW or LW.
– Briefly and repeatedly press “¯¯” (4)or “˙ ”̇ (7).
– Pressing the button longer (over 1 sec-ond) obtains fast forward searching , whichis stopped when the button is released.
To turn on manual tuning search it is nec-essary to turn off the PTY and AF (alterna-tive frequencies) functions, if on.
If the station tuned is a station stored withthe preset buttons, the display will show thepresetting number for a few seconds.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
155
Station scanning (Scan function)
Keeping the “SRC” button pressed (14).Each station found will be heard for a fewseconds and the name and frequency willflash on the display. While searching, thedisplay will show “FM-SCAN”, “AM-SCAN” or “PTY-SCAN” for a few sec-onds.
If the TA function is on (traffic information),the system will search only the stations thatbroadcast traffic bulletins. If the PTY func-tion is on, the system will only search PTYstations.
When the Scan function is on, all the oth-er functions are cancelled.
When wanting to continue listening to astation selected during scanning, press“SRC” (14) again.
The Scan function is interrupted in the fol-lowing cases:
– turning the set off
– pressing “SRC” (14)
– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (startsmanual or automatic tuning)
– pressing a preset button
– turning Autostore on
– turning PTY on/off
– changing the chosen frequency band
– pressing “AUD” (18)
– pressing “MENU” (9)
– when a station is found that is broad-casting a traffic bulletin, if the TA functionis on
– inserting a Compact Disc.
In any case the search function will beturned off after scanning the frequencyband, even if no station is selected.
Scanning preset stations
Press the “MENU” (9) button for a pro-longed length of time to start scanning thepreset stations in the present frequencyband:
– FM: FMI 1, FMI 2, ..., FMI 6, FMII 1,FMII 2, ... FMII 6, FMT 1, FMT 2, ..., FMT 6
– MW: MW 1, MW 2, ..., MW 6
– LW: LW 1, LW 2, ..., LW 6.
Each preset station will be heard for a fewseconds and its name or frequency will flashon the display, if the signal intensity is suf-ficient. In passing from one presetting to an-other the display will show the word“SCAN” for about 2 seconds.
In the first 2 seconds in which the new pre-set station is heard, the display shows thecurrent frequency band and the number ofthe pre-select button.
If the TA function is on (traffic information),the system will only search stations thatbroadcast traffic bulletins.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
156
The preset station Scan function is inter-rupted in the following cases:
– turning the set off
– pressing “BN” (13)
– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (startsmanual or automatic tuning)
– pressing a preset button
– turning Autostore on
– turning PTY on/off
– changing the sound source (CD, CD-Changer)
– changing the FM level or frequency bandselected
– pressing “AUD” (18)
– pressing “MENU” (9)
– when a station is found that is broad-casting a traffic bulletin, if the TA functionis on
– inserting a Compact Disc.
If no presetting has been selected, hear-ing the station chosen previously will be re-sumed.
Manual station storage
The station being heard can be stored inthe range selected with buttons (17),(16), (15), (12), (11), (10) numberedfrom 1 to 6.
Keep one of these buttons pressed (from1 to 6 until receiving the confirmation“beep”. After storage, the display shows thenumber of the button with which the stationhas been stored.
Autostore function
To turn on the Autostore function keep the“BN” button (13) pressed until hearingthe confirmation “beep”. With this functionthe radio automatically stores the stationswith the strongest signal in decreasing orderof intensity of the FMT frequency band.
IMPORTANT Activating the Autostorefunction cancels the stations stored previ-ously in the FMT Band.
If the TA function is on (traffic information),only the stations that send traffic informa-tion will be stored. This function may alsobe turned on when listening to a CompactDisc or the CD-Changer.
During automatic storage the display willshow the wording “A-STORE”. To inter-rupt the storage process press the “BN”(13) button again: the radio will automat-ically tune to the station heard before acti-vation of the Autostore function.
At the end of the Autostore function the ra-dio automatically tunes on the first presetstation in the FM1 band.
On buttons (17), (16), (15), (12),(11), (10) numbered from 1 to 6, the sta-tions are automatically stored that give astrong signal in that moment in the presetband.
After storage the radio automatically tuneson the frequency stored on button 1 (17).
Every station is stored only once, exceptin the case of regional programmes whichin certain cases might be stored twice.
During the automatic storage process thedisplay shows the wording “A-STORE”.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
157
The behaviour of the set during Autostoreis as follows:
– at the beginning of the Autostore func-tion all the other functions are disabled
– any change in volume is not shown onthe display
– pressing one of the radio function but-tons, for example “PTY” (2), “˙ ”̇ (7),“¯¯” (4), (17), (16), (15), (12),(11), (10) the automatic storage processis interrupted, the last station heard beforeAutostore was turned on is tuned and thefunction associated with the button pressedis run
– pressing “AF-TA” (1) during auto-matic storage will interrupt it, the TA func-tion (traffic information) will be turnedon/off and a new automatic storage processwill be started
– Changing the sound source (Radio, Com-pact Disc, CD-Changer) during automaticstorage, Autostore is not interrupted.
IMPORTANT Sometimes the Autostorefunction is unable to find 6 stations with astrong signal. In this case, the free presettingbuttons will be shown on the display, forabout 2 seconds, by 4 dashes and the laststation heard will be returned.
Listening to stored stations
Proceed as follows:
– select the required frequency band (FM,MW, LW)
– briefly press one of the six station stor-age buttons.
The display will show the number that cor-responds to the button.
In bands FM1, FM2 and FMT, if receptionis poor and the AF alternative frequencysearch function is active, the station with thestrongest signal that is broadcasting thesame programme will be sought automati-cally.
AF Function (alternative frequency search)
Within the RDS system the radio can workin two different modes:
AF ON: alternative frequency search on
AF OFF: alternative frequency search off.
When the signal of the RDS station tunedweakens, the following two cases may oc-cur:
– With AF ON the RDS system activatesautomatic tuning of the optimum frequencyof the station chosen, with the stations en-abled, therefore the radio is automaticallytuned to the station with the strongest sig-nal that is broadcasting the same pro-gramme. During the journey it will thus bepossible to continue listening to the stationchosen without having to change the fre-quency when changing area. Of course, thestation being listened to must be receivablein the area the car is crossing.
– With AF OFF the radio will not tunethe strongest station automatically and itwill have to be found manually using thetuner buttons.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
158
To turn alternative frequency search AF ofthe station chosen on/off, keep the “AF-TA” button pressed (1) pressed until hear-ing the “beep”. The name RDS (if available)stays on the display and if the AF functionhas been turned on the symbol “AF” isshown.
If the radio is working in the AM band,when the “AF-TA” (1) is pressed, it pass-es to the FM band on the last station se-lected.
TA function (traffic information)
Some stations in the FM band (FM1, FM2and FMT) are enabled to also broadcast in-formation about traffic conditions. In thiscase the display shows the wording “TP”.
To turn on/off the traffic information TAfunction briefly press (less than 1 second)the “AF-TA” button (1).
The listening conditions and informationgiven on the display may be the following:
TA and TP: if tuned to a station that sendstraffic information and the traffic informa-tion function is on
TP: if tuned to a station that sends traf-fic information but the traffic informationfunction is off
TA(*): the traffic information function ison but the radio is tuned to a station thatdoes not give traffic information
TA and TP not shown on the display: theradio is tuned to a station that does not givetraffic information and the traffic informa-tion function is off.
(*) If the traffic information function TA is on,but the radio station chosen does not give traf-fic information, the device “beeps” every 30 sec-onds.
With the TA function on (traffic informa-tion) it is possible:
a) to search only RDS stations that trans-mit in the FM band, enabled to broadcasttraffic information
b) receive traffic information even if theCompact Disc player or CD-Changer is in use
c) receive traffic information at a prede-fined minimum volume even with the ra-dio volume off.
The operations to be carried out for eachof the three above conditions are listed be-low.
a) To receive stations enabled to broad-cast traffic information:
– select band FM1, FM2 or FMT
– briefly press (less than 1 second) the“AF-TA” button (1) so that the displayshows “TA”.
– press the tuner buttons “˙ ”̇ (7) or“¯¯” (4).
To store stations with TA on, carry out thestorage operations (see “Manual stationstorage”).
b) If wishing to receive traffic informa-tion when listening to a Compact Disc, be-fore inserting the Compact Disc or turningon the CD-Changer, tune to a station enabledto broadcast traffic information (TP) andturn on the TA function. If while listening tothe Compact Disc, this station broadcaststraffic information, the Compact Disc will besuspended temporarily and resumed againautomatically after the end of the message.At the start of reception of traffic informa-tion, the display will briefly show “INFOTRA”, while the display continues givingfurther information (frequency, name, timeof CD etc.).
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
159
If the Compact Disc player is already work-ing and at the same time you want to re-ceive traffic information, briefly pressing(less than 1 second) the “AF-TA” button(1) the radio tunes to the last station heardin the FM band, the TA traffic informationfunction is activated and the traffic messagesare transmitted. If the station selected doesnot send traffic information, the search foran enabled station starts automatically.
If wishing to interrupt the traffic informa-tion message, briefly press (less than 1 sec-ond) the “AF-TA” button (1) during trans-mission of the message.
c) To receive traffic information while notlistening to the radio:
– turn on the TA function, briefly pressing(less than 1 second) “AF-TA” button (1),so that the display shows “TA”
– tune to a station enabled to transmittraffic information so that the displayshows“TP” take the volume to zero keep-ing the “VOL-” button pressed (19).
This way, if that station broadcasts trafficinformation, this will be heard at a minimumpredefined volume.
IMPORTANT In certain countries radiostations exist which, even if the TP functionis on (the display shows “TP”), do nottransmit traffic information.
If the radio is working in the AM bandwhen the “AF-TA” button (1) is pressed,it passes to the FM band on the last sta-tion heard. If the station selected does notbroadcast traffic information (wording “TP”not shown on the display), the search foran enabled station starts automatically.
The volume with which the traffic bulletinis transmitted varies depending on the lis-tening volume:
– listening volume below 30: traffic bul-letin volume = 20 (fixed value)
– listening volume above 30: traffic bul-letin volume the same as the listening vol-ume + 1.
If the volume is changed during a trafficbulletin the value is not shown on the dis-play and the new value is kept only for thebulletin in progress.
During a traffic bulletin it is possible to turnon sound adjustment with the “AUD” but-ton (18). The new values set are also keptat the end of the bulletin.
IMPORTANT If the TA function is onand the station tuned is not able to providetraffic information or it is no longer able toprovide this information (the display will notshow “TP”), so after 1 minute in which theradio is in these conditions:
– if listening to a Compact Disc anotherstation is sought that is enabled to trans-mit traffic information
– if when listening to the radio a “beep”is given to alert that it is not possible to re-ceive traffic information; to interrupt it, it isnecessary to tune to a station that can pro-vide traffic information or switch off the TAfunction.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
160
Emergency alarm reception
In the RDS mode the radio is set to receiveemergency announcements in the case ofexceptional circumstances or events thatmay cause general danger (earthquakes,floods, etc. ) if they are broadcast by thestation tuned.
This function is activated automatically andcannot be deactivated.
Program Type Function (PTY)(selecting a type of programme)
To turn on the PTY function, which makesit possible to give top priority to PTY pro-grammes, when present, which may involveemergency messages or various topics (e.g.music, news bulletins) briefly press the“PTY” button (2) until the display shows“PTY” and the subject of the last stationheard (e.g. “NEWS”).
IMPORTANT To turn on the PTY func-tion, the radio must be in the FM band.
If the station does not broadcast in the PTYmode, the wording “NO-PTY” is shownon the display for 5 seconds.
After 2 seconds the station name or fre-quency is shown on the display.
The list of the various subjects comprises:
NEWS
AFFAIRS
INFO
SPORT
EDUCATE
DRAMA
CULTURE
SCIENCE
VARIED (Variety)
POP M
ROCK M
M, O, R, M (Middle of the Road Music)
LIGHT M (Light music)
CLASSICS
OTHER M (Other music)
To change the type of PTY programmepress “¯¯” (4) or “˙ ”̇ (7) or one ofthe 6 preset buttons. If the display showsthe station frequency or name, pressing“¯¯” (4) or “˙ ”̇ (7) the current typeof programme will be displayed.
To store the current type of programme onone of the 6 preset buttons, give a pro-longed press (over 1 second) on the pre-set button. Storage is confirmed by a“beep”. To seek a station with this pro-gramme see the “Automatic tuning” and“Scanning stations (Scan Function)” para-graphs.
If no station is available with this type ofprogramme the system sounds a “beep”,the station selected previously is heard andfor 2 seconds the display shows the word-ing “NO-PTY”.
To turn the PTY function off briefly pressthe “PTY” (2) button again.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
161
Controlling the station’s type ofPTY programme
To know the type of PTY programme ofthe station heard, keep the “PTY” (2)pressed until a “beep” is heard. After the“beep” the display will show the type of pro-gramme (see previous paragraph) offeredby the station tuned. If the station has noPTY code, the display will show the wording“NO-PTY”. After about 5 seconds the dis-play will again show the RDS name or fre-quency of the station tuned.
EON Function (Enhanced Other Network)
Some countries have circuits which grouptogether several stations enabled to broad-cast traffic information. In this case the pro-gramme of the station being heard, will beinterrupted temporarily to receive traffic in-formation (only with the TA function on),every time these bulletins are given by oneof the stations of the same circuit.
Scrolling transmissions
It is possible to receive different pro-grammes in the same network and scrollthem in FM Band only) - e.g.: NDR1, NDR2,NDR3, NDR4, N-JOY...
To turn on this function, briefly press the“AF-TA” button (1) to turn on the AF func-tion. The user can then start scrolling press-ing “˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4).
IMPORTANT The station must havebeen received previously at least once.
Stereophonic stations
If the signal received is weak, the deviceswitches automatically from Stereo to Mono.
MENU (fig. 137)
Functions of “MENU” button (9)
To turn on the menu function briefly press(less than 1 second) the “MENU” button(9). The display will show the word“MENU”.
To scroll the Menu functions use “▲” (6)or “▼” (8). To turn on/off the function se-lected use “˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4).
The display will show the current statusof the function selected.
The functions controlled by the menu arethe following:
– EQ SET (Equalizer settings, only if theequalizer is on)
– PRESET/USER/CLASSIC/ROCK/JAZZ (Turning on/off and choos-ing predefined equalizer adjustments)
– HICUT (Treble reduction)
– PHONE (Volume of phone, if installed)
– CD NAME (Allocation of CD names,only with CD inserted)
– SVC (Automatic volume control in re-lation to speed)
– SENS DX/LO (Tuning sensitivity)
– CD (CD display setting)
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
162
– CDC (CD-Changer display setting, if in-stalled)
– REG (Regional programmes).
– IGN TIME (Switching off mode)
To exit the Menu function, press the“MENU” button again (9).
Turning the equalizer on/ off(except versions with BOSE HI-FIsystem)
The integrated equalizer can be turned onor off. With the equalizer off, it is possibleto change the sound settings only adjust-ing the bass (“BASS”) and treble tones(“TREBLE”), while activating the functionmakes it possible to adjust the sound curves.
To turn the equalizer off, select “PRE-SET” with “▲” (6) or“▼” (8).
To turn on the equalizer, select one of thefollowing with “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) :
– “USER” (adjustment of the 7 equal-izer bands that can be changed by the user)
– “CLASSIC” (predefined equalizer ad-justment)
– “ROCK” (predefined equalizer adjust-ment)
– “JAZZ” (predefined equalizer adjust-ment).
After selecting the last adjustment set inthe Menu using ▲” (6) or “▼” (8) use,“˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4) to change it.
When one of the equalizer settings is on,the display shows “EQ”.
On versions with BOSE HI-FI system, ana-logue equalizing in amplitude and phase ofthe signal is done automatically by the am-plifier.
Equalizer settings (only if the equalizer is on)
To set a personal equalizer adjustment, use“▲” (6) or “▼” (8) “USER”; the displayshows “EQ SET”.
To change the equalizer settings, use“˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4). The displayshows a graph with 7 bars, where each barrepresents a frequency for the left or rightchannel. Choose the bar to be adjusted us-ing “˙ ”̇ (7) or “¯¯” (4); the bar cho-sen starts to flash and it is possible to adjustit using “▲” (6) or “▼” (8).
To store the new settings, press the“MENU” button again (9). The display stillshows “EQ SET”.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
163
Treble tone reduction function(HICUT)
Using this function it is possible to reducethe treble tones, in accordance with the sig-nal transmitted. To turn this function on/off,use “¯¯” (4) or “˙ ”̇ (7).
The display will show the current statusof the function:
– “HICUT ON”: function on
– “NO HICUT”: function off.
Phone volume adjustmentfunction (PHONE)
With this function it is possible to adjust(setting from 1 to 66) or cut off (OFF set-ting) the telephone sound.
To turn on/off, use “¯¯” (4) or “˙˙”(7).
To adjust the sound, use “VOL+” (21)or “VOL-” (19).
The display will show the current statusof the function:
– “PHONE 23”: function on with vol-ume setting 23
– “PHONE OFF”: function off.
Allocating a name to a CD (CD NAME)
This function can be chosen only if a Com-pact Disc is inserted. To turn on, use “¯¯”(4) or “˙ ”̇ (7): the display will show“CD-NAME”. If the CD already has aname, this will be shown on the display, ifnot, eight dashes will be shown. If storageis no longer available for a new name, thedisplay will show the first name stored.
To change the name or give a name to thenew CD press “¯¯” (4) or “˙˙” (7).Press the buttons again to choose the posi-tion of the character to be changed. Press“▲” (6) or “▼” (8) to choose or changethe character.
To store the name, press the “MENU”button again (9). The display will show“CD-NAME”.
To clear a name, turn the function on andpress “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) to choose thename to be cleared, then press the“MENU” button for about 2 seconds (9).The system beeps and the display shows“ONE CLR” for about 2 seconds. At thispoint the procedure can be started to give anew name.
To clear all the names, turn the functionon and keep the “MENU” button pressedfor about 4 seconds “MENU” (9). The setgives two beeps and the display shows“ALL CLR” for about 2 seconds. At thispoint, it is possible to start the name allo-cation procedure.
Volume changing with speedfunction (SVC)
The SVC function makes it possible to au-tomatically adapt the volume level to thespeed of the car, increasing it as the speedincreases to maintain the ratio with the noiselevel inside the passenger compartment.
To turn the function on/off use “¯¯” (4)or “˙ ”̇ (7). The display will show the cur-rent status of the function:
– “SVC-ON”: function on
– “SVC-OFF”: function off.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
164
Tuner sensitivity adjustment (SENS DX/LO)
With this function it is possible to changethe sensitivity of automatic station search-ing. When low sensitivity is set “SENS-LO” only stations with excellent receptionare sought, when high sensitivity is set“SENS-DX” all stations are sought. There-fore, if the car is in an area with a consid-erable number of stations and you want tochoose only those with a strong signal, setto low sensitivity “SENS-LO”.
To set the sensitivity, use “¯¯” (4) or“˙ ”̇ (7). The display will show the cur-rent status of the function:
– “SENS-LO”: low sensitivity
– “SENS-DX”: high sensitivity.
Compact Disc data displayfunction (CD)
With this function it is possible to choosethe information shown by the display, whenlistening to a Compact Disc.
Two settings are available:
– TIME (time elapsed since the start ofthe track)
– NAME (CD name).
After choosing “CD” in the Menu using“▲” (6) or “▼” (8), the displayshows“CD-DISP”. To change the settinguse “¯ ”̄ (4) or “˙ ”̇ (7).
CD-Changer data display function(CDC) (if installed)
This function can be chosen only if a CD-Changer is connected. In this case the dis-play will show “CDC-DISP”.
To change function, use “¯¯” (4) or“˙ ”̇ (7).
The display shows the setting among thetwo possible: “TIME” and “CD-NR”.
Regional broadcast receptionfunction (REG)
Some national broadcasters, at determi-nate times of the day, transmit regional pro-grammes which differ from region to region.This function makes it possible to tune in on-ly on local stations (regional). However ifa regional programme is heard and you wishto stay tuned to it, the function must be ac-tivated.
To turn the function on/off, use “˙ ”̇(7) or “¯¯” (4).
The display will show the current statusof the function:
– “REG-ON”: function on
– “REG-OFF”: function off.
If the function is off and a regional pro-gramme is tuned that works in a determi-nate area and the car enters a different area,the regional station of the new area is re-ceived.
IMPORTANT When the function is off(“REG-OFF”) and the AF function is on(alternative frequencies) the radio auto-matically tunes to the frequency of the sta-tion selected with the strongest signal.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
165
IGN TIME function
With this function it is possible to chooseif when turning the engine (or the instru-ment panel) off, the sound system shallturn off immediately (00 MIN) or if itshall stay on for other 20 minutes (20MIN).
After selecting “IGN TIME” in themenu using buttons ▲ or ▼, the displaywill show the message “IGN TIME”.
To change setting use button ¯¯ or˙ .̇
Two settings are available:
– “00 MIN”: sound system going offimmediately when turning the engine (orthe instrument panel) off;
– “20 MIN”: sound system staying onfor 20 minutes after turning the engine(or the instrument panel) off.
COMPACT DISC PLAYER (fig. 137)
Selecting the Compact player
To turn on the Compact Disc player inte-grated in the set, when a CD is already in-serted, turn the set on, then briefly and re-peatedly press the “SRC” button (14) toselect the “CD” operating mode. Insertinga CD, also with the device off, the CD play-er is turned on.
Inserting/ejecting a CD
To insert the CD set it gently in place (3)to activate the powered loading system,which will position it correctly.
Press “˚” (5), with the device on, to op-erate the powered CD eject system.
After ejection, the source heard before play-ing the CD will return. The CD cannot beejected if the device is off.
Possible error messages
If the CD inserted is illegible, the displaywill show the wording “CD-ERROR” forabout 2 seconds, then the CD is ejected andthe previous source before CD was select-ed returns.
Display information
When the CD Player is working, the dis-play shows information which has the fol-lowing meaning:
“T05”: shows the number of the track onthe CD
“03:42”: shows the time elapsed sincethe start of the track (if the correspondingMenu function is on)
“MADONNA”: shows the name givento the CD.
Select track (forward/backward)
Briefly press “▲” (6) to play the nexttrack on the CD and “▼” (8) to play theprevious one.
To select tracks continuously, keep the but-ton pressed.
If playing the track started more than 3seconds ago, pressing “▼” (8) the track isplayed again from the start. In this case ifwanting to play the previous track, press thebutton twice consecutively.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
166
Fast forward/backward
Keep “˙̇ ” (7) pressed to move the trackselected forward at high speed and keep“¯¯” (4) pressed to move it quickly back-ward. Fast forward/backward is interrupt-ed once the button is released.
If the CD name display has been chosenin the menu, this will be replaced by theCD time display. After about 2 seconds fromthe last time the button is pressed, the CDname will be displayed again.
Pause function
To pause the CD player press the presetbutton 3 (15). The display will show “CD-PAUSE”.
To listen again, press the preset button 3again (15).
Scannning pieces on the CD (Scan Function)
With this function it is possible to hear allthe pieces contained on a CD.
Keep the “SRC” button pressed (14) forover one second to play the first 10 secondsof each track on the CD. While the track isplaying the display will alternately show, for2 seconds, the CD function chosen (CD timeor name) and the word ing “SCAN”. If theScan function is on, Repeat and Mix areturned off.
The scanning sequence is the following:
– from the track played up to the last oneon the CD
– from the first one on the CD up to theone played the moment scanning was start-ed.
The Scan function is interrupted in the fol-lowing cases:
– turning the set off
– pressing the “SRC” button again (14)to continue listening to the track that wasbeing played
– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (press-ing them together the track will be skipped)
– pressing a preset button
– turning Autostore on
– turning PTY on
– changing the sound source
– pressing “AUD” (18)
– If the TA function is on and the stationselected is broadcasting a traffic bulletin
– pressing “MENU” (9).
If the Scan function is not interrupted, atthe end it will continue playing the trackplayed before scanning was started.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
167
Repeat
Briefly press the preset button 4 (12) tolisten repeatedly to the last track played: forabout 2 seconds the display will show “RPTTRACK”.
Press preset button 4 (12) again to turnoff the repeat function: for about 2 secondsthe display will show “RPT OFF”. Whenthe function is on the display shows “RPT”.
Changing the sound source, the functionis turned off.
IMPORTANT When the repeat functionis turned on, the Scan and Mix functions areturned off.
Random playing (MIX function)
To start the random playing of tracks onthe Compact Disc, press the preset button 5(11). A new track will be played and forabout 2 seconds the display will show “CD-MIX-ON”. Press the preset button 5 (11)again to turn the function off: for about 2seconds the display will show “CD-MIX-OFF”.
When the Mix function is on, all the trackson the CD are played in random sequence.
Changing the sound source, the functionis turned off.
IMPORTANT When the Mix function isturned on, Scan and Repeat are turned off.
TPM Function (CD playing sequence storage)
With the TPM function (Track programmemory) it is possible to store the sequencefor playing tracks of a CD, to be able to playthem later in the sequence set.
To turn the function on briefly press (lessthan 1 second) the preset button 1 (17),while listening to a CD. When the functionis on, the display shows “TPM”.
To store tracks, select the track required,then press the preset button 1 (17) forabout 1 second, until hearing the beep; thedisplay will show “STORED”. Repeat thisprocedure for all the other tracks to be stored.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
168
CLR Function (clearing CD track storage)
With the CLR function it is possible to clearone or all the CD tracks stored with the TPMfunction.
To clear only one track from storage, se-lect it using buttons “▲” (6) or “▼” (8)when the TPM function is on, then press thepreset button 2 (16) for about 2 seconds;the TPM function is turned off, a beep isheard and the display shows “TR CLR”.
To clear all the tracks of the CD selectedfrom storage, turn on the TPM function thenpress preset button 2 (16) for about 4 sec-onds; the TPM function is turned off, a dou-ble beep is heard after about 2 and 4 sec-onds and the display shows “CD CLR”.
CD-CHANGER(Compact Disc Player)
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo offers two kitsfor the CD-Changer (multiple Compact Discplayer) for 5 and 10 discs, complete withmultipolar cable for connection with the ra-dio and a support bracket for assembly.
Selecting the CD-CHANGER
To turn on the CD-Changer, turn on the set,then press briefly and repeatedly the “SRC”button (14) to select the “CHANGER”.
When listening to a Compact Disc for thefirst time after putting it in the CD loader,playing starts from the first track on the firstdisc available in the loader.
Possible error messages
If the CD selected is not available due tolack of the loader or because the loader isnot inserted in the CD-Changer, the displayshows “CHANGER”.
If the CD played is illegible the displayshows “CD-ERROR”, the next CD will beselected; if there are no other CDs or if theyare also illegible, the display will show thewording “NO CD” until the sound source ischanged.
In the event of a fault to the CD-Changeror difficulty in removing the loader, the dis-play will show the wording “CD ERROR”.
Display information
When the CD-Changer is working, the dis-play shows the following information whichmeans:
“T05”: shows the number of the track onthe CD
“03:42”: shows the time elapsed sincethe start of the track (if the correspondingMenu function is on)
“CD 04”: the number of the CD in theloader.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
169
Choosing the CD
Press “¯¯” (4) to select the previous CDand “˙ ”̇ (7) to select the next CD. If inthe menu the CD time display function wasselected, this will be replaced for about 2seconds by the CD number.
If the loader does not contain a disc in theposition selected, the display briefly showsthe wording “NO CD”, and the next discis played automatically.
Select track (forward/backward)
Briefly press “▲” (6) to play the nexttrack of the CD chosen and “▼” (8) to playthe previous track.
To select tracks continuously, keep the but-ton pressed.
If playing the track started more than 3seconds ago, pressing “▼” (8) the track isplayed again from the start. In this case ifwanting to play the previous track, press thebutton twice consecutively.
Fast forward/backward
Keep “˙̇ ” (7) pressed to move the trackselected forward at high speed and keep“¯¯” (4) pressed to move it quickly back-ward. Fast forward/backward is interrupt-ed once the button is released.
A brief press on the button moves the trackforward or backward 1 second.
If the CD number display function was se-lected in the menu, this will be replaced forabout 2 seconds by the CD time display func-tion.
Scanning CD tracks (Scan function)
With this function it is possible to listen toall the tracks contained on the CD selected.
Keep the “SRC” button pressed (14) formore than one second to play the first 10seconds of every track on the CD. Whileplaying, the display will alternately show forabout 2 seconds the CD function chosen(CD-Name, time or number) and the word“SCAN”. If the Scan function is on, the Re-peat and Mix functions are turned off.
The scanning sequence is the following:
– from the track played up to the last ofthe tracks on the CD
– change of CD and scanning all the tracks(and so on for all the CDs in the changer)
– from the first track up to the one playeduntil the start of scanning.
The Scan function is interrupted in the fol-lowing cases:
– turning the set off
– pressing the “SRC” button again (14)to continue listening to the track that wasbeing played
– pressing “▲” (6) or “▼” (8) (press-ing them together the track will be skipped)
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
170
– pressing a preset button
– turning Autostore on
– turning PTY on
– changing the sound source
– pressing “AUD” (18)
– If the TA function is on and the stationselected is broadcasting a traffic bulletin
– pressing “MENU” (9).
If the Scan function is not interrupted, atthe end it will continue playing the trackplayed before scanning was started.
Pause function
To pause the CD-Changer press the presetbutton 3 (15). The display will show “CD-PAUSE”.
To resume playing the track, press presetbutton 3 (15) again.
Repeat
Briefly press the preset button 4 (12) tolisten repeatedly to the last track played: forabout 2 seconds the display will show “RPTTRUCK”.
Press preset button 4 (12) again to turnoff the repeat function: for about 2 secondsthe display will show “RPT OFF”. Whenthe function is on the display shows “RPT”.
Changing the sound source, the functionis turned off.
IMPORTANT When the repeat functionis turned on, the Scan and Mix functions areturned off.
Random playing (Mix function)
To start the random playing of tracks onthe Compact Disc, press the preset button 5(11). A new track will be played and forabout 2 seconds the display will show “CD-MIX-ON”. Press the preset button 5 (11)again to turn the function off: for about 2seconds the display will show “CD-MIX-OFF”.
When the Mix function is on, all the trackson the CD are played in random sequence.
Changing the sound source, the functionis turned off.
IMPORTANT When the Mix function isturned on, Scan and Repeat are turned off.
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
171
Protection fuse
The radio has a 10A fuse located in therear part of the set. To replace the fuse, theradio needs to be pulled out: therefore con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
fig. 141
A0A0440m
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Radio
Maximum power: 4 x 40W.
Aerial (fig. 139)
The aerial is located on the car roof. Youare recommended to slacken and removethe aerial from the roof to avoid damagingit when washing the car in an automatic sys-tem.
fig. 139
A0A0438m
Speakers (fig. 140-141)
The sound system is formed of a systemcomprising:
– 4 tweeters (A) (2 front and 2 rear)with 30W power
– 4 speakers (B) with a diameter of 165mm (2 front and 2 rear) with 40W power.
fig. 140
A0A0439m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
172
BOSE HI-FI SOUND SYSTEM
The BOSE HI-FI system has been accuratelydesigned for the Alfa 147 GTA, tooffer outstanding sound quality and repro-duce the musical realism of a live concert,for all the seats in the passenger compart-ment.
The system’s features include outstand-ingly faithful reproduction of crystalline tre-ble tones and full, rich basses which amongother things, make the Loudness functionsuperfluous. In addition, the complete rangeof the sounds is reproduced in the whole pas-senger compartment enveloping the occu-pants with the natural spatial sensation thatis felt when listening to live music.
The components adopted are patented andare the result of the most sophisticated tech-nology, but at the same time they are easyand intuitive to use, so that even less expertpeople can use the system.
fig. 144
A0A0338m
fig. 143
A0A0442m
TECHNICAL INFORMATION(fig. 142-143-144)
System comprises:
– four high efficiency woofers (A) with di-ameter 165 mm, two at the front and twoat the back, each having a coaxial tweeterinside;
– a bass box with a volume of 12 dm3
(B) housed on the left-hand side of theboot;
– a high power HI-FI amplifier (150W)with 6 channels, analogue equalising in am-plitude signal phase and with 130 mm di-ameter sub-woofer.
fig. 142
A0A0441m
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
173
REFUELLING
The antipollution deviceson the car oblige the use ofonly four-star unleaded
petrol with an octane number(R.O.N.) of 95 or over.
Never use leaded petrol,as this would irreversiblydamage the exhaust gas
catalyst. If leaded fuel is added tothe fuel tank, no matter how smallthe quantity, DO NOT START THEENGINE. Do not attempt to dilutethe fuel in the tank, completelydrain the fuel circuit and tank.
To prevent accidentally filling with leadedpetrol, the diameter of the fuel tank filleris of such a size as not to accept the noz-zle of this type of petrol.
An inefficient catalystleads to harmful emissionat the exhaust, thus envi-
ronment pollution.
FUEL CAP (fig. 145)
The fuel cap (A) is key-lockable and has acatch to prevent misplacing it (B) that fas-tens it to the flap (C); to gain access to it,open the flap then use the ignition key to turncounter-clockwise and remove the cap.
When refuelling, hook the cap to the de-vice on the inner flap, as illustrated.
IMPORTANT The sealing of the tankmay cause light pressurising. A little breath-ing off, while slackening the cap is ab-solutely normal.
fig. 145
A0A0443m
After refuelling, turn the cap clockwise un-til one or more clicks are heard; then turnthe key clockwise to lock. Close the flap.
IMPORTANT For your safety, beforestarting the engine, also make sure that thefuel nozzle is correctly inserted in the fueldistributor.
In the case of need, onlyreplace the fuel cap withanother genuine one, or the
efficiency of the fuel vapour re-covery system could be adverselyaffected.
Do not go near the fuelfiller with naked flames or
lit cigarettes: danger of fire. Avoidgoing too near the fuel filler withyour face, to avoid inhaling harm-ful vapours.
WARNING
GET
TIN
G T
O K
NO
W Y
OUR C
AR
174
EMISSION REDUCING DEVICES
Trivalent catalytic converter(catalytic silencer)
The exhaust system is fitted with a cata-lyst formed of alloys of precious metals; itis housed in a stainless steel container whichis able to withstand the high operating tem-peratures.
The catalyst converts the unburnt hydro-carbons, carbon monoxide and nitric oxidein the exhaust gas (even in minimal quan-tity owing to the electronic ignition and in-jection systems) into non polluting com-pounds.
Lambda sensors
Lambda sensors measure the content ofoxygen present in the exhaust gas. The sig-nal transmitted by the Lambda sensors isused by the injection and ignition electron-ic control unit to adjust the air - fuel mixture.
Anti-evaporation system
As it is impossible, even when the engineis switched off, to prevent the formation offuel vapours, a system has been devisedwhich traps the vapours in a special acti-vated carbon container.
When the engine is running these vapoursare withdrawn and sent to combustion.
ENVIRONMENTALPROTECTION
The design and construction of the vehi-cle have not only been developed with thetraditional aspects of performance and safe-ty in mind, but also take into account the in-creasingly pressing problems tied to pro-tecting the environment.
The choice of materials, techniques andparticular parts are the result of work whichhas made it possible to drastically reducethe harmful effects on the environment andguarantee compliance with the most strin-gent international regulations.
USE OF NON-TOXIC MATERIALS
None of the components of the vehicle con-tain asbestos. The padding and the climatecontrol system do not contain CFCs whichare held responsible for the destruction ofthe ozone layer.
The colouring agents and the corrosion in-hibitors used on the nuts, screws and boltsdo not contain cadmium or chrome whichcould pollute the atmosphere or water tables.
Due to the high tempera-tures reached during oper-
ation of the catalytic silencer thevehicle should not be parked overinflammable materials (paper, fu-el oils, grass, dry leaves etc.).
WARNING
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
175
STARTING PROCEDURE
IMPORTANT It is important never topress the accelerator before the engine hasstarted.
1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Move the gear lever to neutral.
3) Fully depress the clutch pedal, so thatthe starter motor is not forced to crank thegears.
4) Ensure that the electric systems and de-vices, especially if they absorb high quanti-ties of energy (e.g. heated rearscreen) areswitched off.
5) Turn the ignition key to the AVV po-sition and release it as soon as the enginestarts.
6) If the engine does not start, return thekey to STOP then repeat the procedure.
IMPORTANT If it is difficult to start theengine do not insist with extended attemptswhich may damage the catalyst, but con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
The ignition switch is fitted with a safetydevice which obliges the driver to return thekey to the STOP position before repeat-ing the starting operation if the engine doesnot start immediately.
Similarly, when the engine is running, thedevice prevents the key being moved fromthe MAR to the AVV position.
STARTINGTHE ENGINE
IMPORTANT The car is fitted with anelectronic engine lock device. If the enginefails to start, see “The Alfa Romeo CODE sys-tem”.
CCOORRRREECCTT UUSSEE OOFF TTHHEE CCAARR
We recommend that dur-ing the initial period you donot drive to full vehicle
performance (for example exces-sive acceleration, long journeys attop speed, hard braking etc.).
When the engine isswitched off never leavethe ignition key in the MAR
position to prevent pointless cur-rent absorption from draining thebattery.
Running the engine in con-fined areas is extremely
dangerous. The engines consumesoxygen and produces carbonmonoxide which is a highly toxicand lethal gas.
WARNING
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
176
IMPORTANT The electric devicesthat absorb a high amount of energy (cli-mate control, rearscreen heating etc.) arecut off automatically during starting.
If the engine does not start at the firstattempt, move the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.
If starting is difficult (with the AlfaRomeo CODE system working properly),do not insist with prolonged attempts.
Only use an auxiliary battery if the causeis due to low battery charge. Never use abattery charger to start the engine.
WARMING THE ENGINE
– Drive off slowly, at medium revs with-out accelerating abruptly.
– Do not drive at full performance for theinitial kilometres of the journey. Wait untilthe engine coolant temperature reaches 50-60 °C.
SWITCHING OFF
– Release the accelerator pedal and waituntil the engine reaches idle speed.
– Turn the ignition key to the STOP po-sition and switch off the engine.
IMPORTANT After a tiring journey it isadvisable to let the engine “get its breathback” allowing it to idle a while to lower thetemperature in the engine compartment.
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
177
EMERGENCY STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system does notrecognise the code transmitted by the igni-tion key (Y) warning light on the instru-ment cluster on glowing steadily) emer-gency starting may be carried out using thecode of the CODE card.
For the correct procedure see the chapter“In an emergency”.
PARKING
When the vehicle is parked, proceed as fol-lows:
– Switch off the engine.
– Engage the handbrake.
– Engage first gear if the vehicle is fac-ing uphill or reverse if the vehicle is facingdownhill.
– Turn the front wheels so that the vehi-cle will immediately come to a halt if thehandbrake slips.
Never bump, tow, orcoast start the vehicle asthis would cause fuel to
flow into the catalyst causing irre-versible damage.
To avoid useless con-sumption of power andpossibly draining the bat-
tery, never leave the ignition keyin the MAR position when the en-gine is not running.
Sharp accelerating beforeswitching the engine offshould be avoided. A
“kick” on the accelerator servesno purposes and consumes fuelpointlessly.
IMPORTANT If the engine turns off withthe vehicle on the move, the next time itis started, the Alfa Romeo CODE warninglight may turn on (Y). In this case, checkthat switching off and starting the engineagain with the vehicle stationary, the warn-ing light stays off. If not, contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services.
Remember that the servo-brake and power steering
are not operational until the enginehas been started, therefore muchmore effort than usual is requiredon the brake pedal and steeringwheel.
WARNING
Never leave children unat-tended in the vehicle. Al-
ways remove the ignition keywhen leaving the vehicle and takeit with you.
WARNING
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
178
SAFE DRIVING
In designing your Alfa 147 GTA, Al-fa Romeo has worked thoroughly to achievea vehicle able to offer top levels of safety toits passengers. However, the behaviour ofthe driver is still a decisive factor for roadsafety.
Below you will find a few simple rules fortravelling safely under different conditions.You are certainly familiar with many of thembut it is still helpful to read them all care-fully.
BEFORE DRIVING OFF
– Make sure the lights and headlights areworking properly.
– Adjust the seat, steering wheel and rear-view mirrors, in order to obtain a correct po-sition for driving.
– Carefully adjust the headrests so thatthe head and not the neck rests on them.Check that nothing (mats etc.) can get un-der the foot pedals.
– Make sure that any child restraint sys-tems (seats, cradles, etc.) are correctly fas-tened on the rear seat.
– Place any objects in the boot with careto prevent abrupt braking from throwingthem forwards.
– Avoid heavy meals before a journey. Alight meal will help to keep reflexes ready.Above all avoid alcohol.
Routinely remember to check:
– tyre pressure and conditions;
– engine oil level;
– engine coolant fluid level and systemconditions;
– brake fluid level;
– power steering oil level;
– windscreen washer fluid level.
WHEN TRAVELLING
– The first rule for safe driving is care.
– Care also means being able to predictthe actions of other road users.
– Strictly respect the traffic regulations inall countries, especially the speed limits.
– Ensure that both yourself and your pas-sengers are wearing their seat belts, thatchildren are carried with the appropriateseats and that any animals are in appropri-ate compartments.
– Long distances should be tackled in goodhealth.
Driving under the influenceof drugs and/or some
medicines is highly dangerous foroneself and for others.
WARNING
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
179
– Do not drive for long periods without abreak. During breaks get out of the vehicleand move around a bit to shake off thedrowsiness.
– Make sure the air in the passenger com-partment is changed constantly.
– Never coast the vehicle downhill withthe engine switched off: this eliminates theengine braking and power steering effectthus requiring a greater effort on the pedaland steering wheel.
NIGHT DRIVING
Here are some suggestions for night dri-ving.
– Drive with particular care: night drivinginvolves a greater degree of concentration.
– Reduce speed, especially on unlit roads.
– At the first signs of drowsiness stop thecar: continuing the journey is dangerous foryourself and others. Continue driving onlyafter sufficient rest.
– Maintain a greater distance from the ve-hicle in front than in the day: it is more dif-ficult to judge the speed of a vehicle whenonly the lights can be seen.
– Ensure that the headlights are correctlyaimed: if they are too low, visibility is re-duced and eyesight is tired. If they are toohigh they may cause disturbance to otherroad users.
– Use the main beams only outside built-up areas and only when you are certain thatother drivers are not disturbed by their use.
– When meeting oncoming vehicles,switch off the main beams and drive withthe dipped-beam headlights on.
– Keep the headlights and light unitsclean.
– Outside built-up areas take care of ani-mal crossings.
Always fasten the front andrear seat belts including
those of any children’s seat. Trav-elling without seat belts increasesthe risks of serious injury or evendeath in the event of an accident.
WARNING
Take car when fitting addi-tional spoilers, alloy wheels
and wheel caps: they might reduceventilation of the brakes, thus theirefficiency, during abrupt and re-peated braking, or long downhillslopes.
WARNING
Never drive with objectson the floor in front of the
driver’s seat: they might get stuckunder the pedals making it impos-sible to accelerate or brake.
WARNING
Make sure any mats areappropriate in size: even a
slight inconvenience to the brakingsystem may require a higher ped-al stroke than normal.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on theroads may deposit on the
brake disks, reducing the effec-tiveness of the brakes the firsttime they are used.
WARNING
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
180
DRIVING WITH RAIN
Rain and wet roads can be dangerous.
If the road is wet, the traction betweenwheel and asphalt is greatly reduced, thusincreasing the stopping distance and de-creasing road holding.
Here are a few suggestions in the case ofrain:
– Reduce speed and keep further backfrom the vehicle in front.
– Heavy rain also reduces visibility. Inthese cases, turn on the headlights even dur-ing the day to make yourself more visibleto others.
– Do not drive over puddles at high speedand hold the steering wheel firmly: you maylose control of the car (aquaplaning).
– Position the ventilation controls fordemisting (as described in the chapter (“Get-ting to know your car”), to prevent visibili-ty from worsening.
– Routinely check the conditions of thewindscreen wiper blades.
DRIVING IN FOG
– If fog is very thick, avoid travellingwhere possible. If travelling with mist,ground fog or the possibility of fog banks:
– Drive at moderate speed.
– Also in the day turn on the dipped-beamheadlights, rear fog guards and front foglights. Do not use the main-beam headlights.
IMPORTANT If visibility in some partsimproves, switch off the rear fog guards; theintense light disturbs the occupants of ve-hicles behind.
– Remember that fog also involves wetasphalt, thus greater difficulty in all types ofmanoeuvres and longer stopping distances.
– Keep well away from the vehicle infront.
– Where possible avoid sudden changesin speed.
– Possibly avoid overtaking other vehicles.
– If the vehicle is forced to stop (faults,impossibility to continue due to poor visi-bility, etc.), firstly try to pull off the road.Then turn on the hazard warning lights and,if possible the dipped-beam headlights.Rhythmically sound the horn if you note an-other car coming.
MOUNTAIN DRIVING
– When travelling down hill use the en-gine braking by engaging lower gears to pre-vent the brakes from overheating.
– Never coast down hill with the engineoff or in neutral and especially not with theignition key removed.
– Drive at a moderate speed and avoidcutting corners.
– Remember that overtaking up hill isslower and therefore requires a greaterlength of clear road. If you are being over-taken on a hill, move over to enable the oth-er vehicle to pass in safety.
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
181
DRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE
Here are a few suggestions for driving inthese conditions:
– Drive very slowly.
– On a snowy road, fit winter tyres orsnow chains; see the related paragraphs inthis chapter.
– Use engine braking where possible andavoid abrupt braking.
– Braking with a car without ABS, avoidlocking the wheels, modulating the pressureon the brake pedal.
– Avoid abrupt acceleration and changesof direction.
– During cold weather even apparently dryroads may be covered with occasional patch-es of ice. Pay great attention therefore whendriving on roads which are in the shade, orwhere rocks or trees line the road and onwhich ice may persist.
– Keep further back from the vehicle infront.
DRIVING WITH ABS
The ABS is a part of the braking systemwhich essentially offers 2 advantages:
1) it prevents locking, thus skidding, of thewheels during emergency braking and es-pecially under conditions with poor grip;
2) it allows braking and steering at thesame time, to avoid any sudden obstaclesor to direct the car as required when brak-ing, compatibly with the physical limits oflateral grip of the tyre.
To make the most of the ABS:
– In emergency braking or when grip islow, a slight pulsing can be felt on the brakepedal: this means that the ABS has come in-to action. Do not release the pedal, but con-tinue pressing it to give continuity to thebraking action.
– The ABS prevents the wheels from lock-ing but it does not increase the physical lim-its of grip between the asphalt and the road.Therefore, also with a car fitted with ABS,keep within a safety distance from the ve-hicle in front and limit speed when ap-proaching bends.
The ABS serves to increase vehicle con-trollability not to go faster.
REDUCING RUNNINGCOSTS ANDENVIRONMENTPOLLUTION
By following a few simple guidelines, itis possible to save vehicle running costs andreduce harmful emissions.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Vehicle maintenance
The conditions of the vehicle represent animportant factor which affects fuel con-sumption as well as travelling tranquillityand the life of the vehicle. For this reason,it is wise to take care of its maintenancehave the checks and adjustments carried outin accordance with the “Scheduled Mainte-nance Programme” (see... spark plugs, aircleaner, timing).
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
182
Tyres
Check the pressure of the tyres routinely atan interval of no more than 4 weeks: if thepressure is too low consumption levels in-crease as resistance to rolling is higher. Itshould be underscored that in these condi-tions tyre wear increases and vehicle per-formance is lower, therefore also its safety.
Useless loads
Never travel with an overload in the boot.The weight of the vehicle (especially in ur-ban traffic), and its geometry heavily affectconsumption levels and stability.
Luggage/ski racks
Remove the luggage rack or ski rack fromthe roof as soon as they are no longer used.These accessories lower air penetration andadversely affect consumption levels. Whenneeding to carry particularly voluminous ob-jects, preferably use a trailer.
Electric services
Use electric devices only for the amount oftime needed. Rearscreen heating, addition-al headlights, windscreen wipers and heaterfan need a considerable amount of energytherefore, increasing the requirement of cur-rent increases fuel consumption (up to+25% in the urban cycle).
Climate control system
The climate control system is a further loadbearing heavily on the engine inducing high-er consumption levels (up to +20% on av-erage). Outside temperature permitting,preferably use the air vents.
Aerodynamic items
The use of non-certified aerodynamic itemsmay adversely affect air drag and con-sumption levels.
DRIVING STYLE
Starting
Do not warm the engine with the car at astandstill or at idle or high speed: underthese conditions the engine warms up muchmore slowly, increasing electrical consump-tion and emissions. It is therefore advisableto move off immediately, slowly, avoidinghigh speeds. This way the engine will warmfaster.
Pointless manoeuvres
Avoid accelerating when waiting at trafficlights or before switching off the engine. Thisand also double declutching is absolutelypointless on modern cars and also increaseconsumption and pollution.
Gear shifting
As soon as the conditions of the traffic androad allow, use a higher gear. Using a lowgear to obtain brilliant performance increasesconsumption. In the same way improper useof a high gear increases consumption, emis-sions and engine wear.
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
183
Top speed
Fuel consumption considerably increaseswith speed: it is helpful to note that passingfrom 90 to 120 km/h consumption in-creases by about +30%. Also maintain aneven as possible speed, avoiding superflu-ous braking and accelerating again, whichcost in terms of both fuel and emissions. Itis therefore advisable to adopt a “smooth”driving style trying to anticipate manoeuvresto avoid imminent hazards and respect safe-ty distances to avoid sudden slowing.
Acceleration
Accelerating heavily taking the engine toa high speed, has a considerably adverse ef-fect on consumption and emission levels;it is wise to accelerate gradually and not ex-ceed the maximum torque.
CONDITIONS OF USE
Cold starting
Short journeys and frequent cold starts donot allow the engine to reach optimum op-erating temperature. This results in a sig-nificant increase in consumption levels (from+15 to +30% on the urban cycle) and emis-sion of harmful substances.
Traffic situations androad conditions
Rather high consumption levels are tied tosituations with heavy traffic, for examplein queues with frequent use of the lowergears or in cities with many traffic lights.
Also winding mountain roads and roughroad surfaces adversely affect consumption.
Stopping in the traffic
During prolonged stops (e.g. level cross-ings) it is advisable to switch the engine off.
ECONOMY ANDENVIRONMENTFRIENDLY DRIVING
Environment protection is one of the prin-ciples that guided the development of yourAlfa 147 GTA.
It is not merely by chance that its antipol-lution devices obtain results far beyond thosespecified by current regulations.
However, the environment still needs theutmost care from all of us.
By following a few simple rules it is pos-sible to avoid damage to the environmentand very often at the same time to limit fu-el consumption. On this subject we are giv-ing some helpful suggestions to be addedto those marked with the # in various pointsof this booklet.
Kindly read them all carefully.
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
184
PROTECTING EMISSIONREDUCING DEVICES
Correct operation of the anti-pollution de-vices not only guarantees respect for the en-vironment but also influences vehicle per-formance. Keeping these devices in goodcondition is therefore the first rule for bothenvironment-friendly and economy driving.
The first precaution is to closely follow the“Programmed Maintenance Schedule”. Useonly unleaded petrol (95 RON) (Specifica-tion EN228).
If difficulty with starting is experienced donot insist with extended attempts. Especiallyavoid bump, tow or coast starts: these mayall damage the catalyst. Only use an auxil-iary battery to start the car in an emergency.
If when driving the engine is not runningsmoothly, continue, minimising the need forengine performance and contact Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services as soon as possible.
When the fuel reserve warning light turnson, fill up as soon as possible. A low fuel lev-el may cause an irregular supply to the en-gine with inevitable increase of the exhaustgas temperature; this would result in seriousdamage to the catalyst.
Never run the engine, even as a test, withone or more spark plugs disconnected. Donot warm the engine at idle speed beforemoving off, unless the outside temperatureis very low and, in this case too, for no morethan 30 seconds.
Do not spray anything onthe catalyst, lamda sensor
and exhaust pipe.
WARNING
The failure to follow theserules may cause a fire
hazard.
WARNINGDo not install other heatguards and do not remove
the existing ones on the catalystand exhaust pipe.
WARNING
During normal service thecatalyst reaches high tem-
peratures. Do not therefore parkthe car over inflammable materials(grass, dry leaves, pine needles,etc.): fire hazard.
WARNING
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
185
IMPORTANT When winter tyres areused with a maximum speed index belowthe one that can be reached by the vehicle(increased by 5%), place a notice in the pas-senger compartment, plainly in the driver’sview which states the maximum permissi-ble speed of the winter tyres (as per CE Di-rective).
Fit the same type of tyre on all four wheels(brand and profile) to ensure higher drivingsafety when braking and good handling.
Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.
WINTER TYRES
These tyres are specially designed for dri-ving on snow and ice, to be fitted in re-placement of those fitted on the car.
Use winter tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided on the car.
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services will bepleased to advise you on the choice of thecar most suited to the use the Customer in-tends to make of it.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of wintertyres, follow the instructions given in the“Technical Specifications” chapter.
The winter features of these tyres are re-duced considerably when the tread depthis below 4 mm. In this case, they should bereplaced.
Due to the winter features, under normalconditions of use or on long motorway jour-neys, the performance of these tyres is low-er than that of normal tyres.
It is necessary therefore to limit their use tothe purposes for which they are certified.
TRAILER TOWING
The car does not have the approval to towtrailers.
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
186
VEHICLEINACTIVITY
If the vehicle is to be left inactive for longperiods, the following precautions should benoted:
– House the vehicle under cover in a dryand possibly ventilated place.
– Engage a gear.
– Check that the handbrake is not en-gaged.
– Clean and protect the paintwork by pro-tective wax.
– Cover the rubber windscreen andrearscreen wiper blades with talcum powderand raise them off the glass.
– Open the windows slightly.
– Inflate the tyres to a pressure of 0.5 barsabove normal. If possible rest the tyres onwooden planks and periodically check thepressure.
– Do not turn on the electronic alarm sys-tem.
Keep you speeddown when snowchains are fitted.
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoidpotholes, steps and pavements toprevent damaging the tyres, sus-pension and steering.
Snow chains should only be applied to thedrive wheels (front).
Before purchasing or using snow chains,you are recommended to contact AlfaRomeo Authorised Services.
Check the tension of the chain after thefirst few metres have been driven.
SNOW CHAINS
Use of snow chains should be in compli-ance with local regulations.
Use snow chains with reduced size withmaximum protrusion beyond the tyre pro-file of 12 mm.
Snow chains may not beused on tyres type 225/45ZR 17”, 235/35 R18”.
Only spider type chains can be usedon tyres type 215/45 R17” and215/45 ZR17”. SPIKES SPIDERCOMPACT snow chains (17003compact model) with 9 arms and 16mm adjustable length and 17"wheel cover adapter are availableat Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo. Keepyour speed down when this type ofchains is fitted. Do not exceed 50km/h with this type of chains,avoid sudden acceleration and de-activate the ASR system (the warn-ing light on the button shall be on).Remember that snow chains makebraking distance longer.
CO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE
CAR
187
USEFUL ACCESSORIES
Independently of current regulations, wesuggest you keep the following on board(fig. 2):
– first aid kit containing non-alcoholic dis-infectant, sterile gauzes, gauze roll, plas-ters, etc.;
– electric torch;
– rounded scissors;
– work gloves.
fig. 2
A0A0148m
– Disconnect the battery negative termi-nal (–) from the battery and check the bat-tery charge. This check should be repeatedonce a month during stowage. Charge thebattery if the loadless voltage is below12.5V.
– Do not empty the engine cooling sys-tem.
– Cover the vehicle with a fabric or per-forated plastic cover. Do not use compactplastic covers which prevent the humidity onthe surface of the vehicle from evaporating.
USING AGAIN
Before using the car again after a pro-longed period of inactivity, the following op-erations are recommended:
– Do not dust the outside of the car.
– Check for leaks of fluids (oil, brake andclutch fluid, engine coolant fluid, etc.).
– Change the engine oil and filter.
– Check the level of brake and clutch flu-id engine coolant fluid.
– Check the air cleaner and change it ifnecessary.
– Check the tyre pressure and the tyresfor signs of damage, cuts or cracks. In thiscase they need to be changed.
– Check the conditions of the engine belts.
– Re-connect the battery negative termi-nal (–) after checking the battery charge.
– With the gears in neutral, start the en-gine and let it idle a few minutes, pressingthe clutch pedal repeatedly.
This operation must be car-ried out in the open.
Exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide which highly toxic andlethal.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
188
3) Fully depress the accelerator pedal andkeep it pressed. The U warning light willcome on for eight seconds and then go off,now release the accelerator pedal.
4) The U warning light begins to flash:after it has flashed the same number oftimes as the first digit on the CODE card,press the accelerator pedal and keep itpressed until the U warning light turns on(for four seconds) and then goes off, nowrelease the accelerator pedal.
5) The Uwarning light starts to flash: af-ter the number of flashes corresponding tothe second digit on the CODE card, press theaccelerator pedal and keep it pressed.
6) Repeat this procedure for the remain-ing digits on the CODE card.
7) After entering the last figure, keep theaccelerator pedal pressed. The U warn-ing light turns on (for four seconds) andthen goes off; now release the accelera-tor pedal.
8) A quick flash of the U warning light(for about 4 seconds) confirms that the op-eration has been carried out correctly.
9) Start the engine turning the ignition keyfrom MAR to AVV without returning thekey to the STOP position.
Conversely, if the U warning light stayson, turn the key to STOP and repeat theprocedure starting from point 1).
IMPORTANT After emergency startingit is advisable to contact an Alfa Romeo Au-thorised Service, because the emergencyprocedure must be repeated each time theengine is started.
EMERGENCYSTARTING
If it is not possible to deactivate the engineinhibitor with the Alfa Romeo CODE system,theY andU warning lights stay on andthe engine will not start. Emergency start-ing is needed to start the engine.
IMPORTANT You are advised to care-fully read the entire procedure before car-rying it out.
If a mistake is made during the emergencyprocedure, the ignition key should be turnedto STOP and the operations must be re-peated from the start (point 1).
1) Read the 5-figure electronic code on theCODE card.
2) Turn the ignition key to MAR.
IINN AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
189
STARTING WITH AN AUXILIARY BATTERY
If the battery is flat, (for battery with op-tical hydrometer: dark colour without greenarea in the centre), it is possible to start theengine using an auxiliary battery with thesame capacity or a little higher than the flatone.
Proceed as follows (fig. 1):
1) Remove the protective cover on the pos-itive battery post, pressing on the openingcatches (front), then connect the positiveterminals (+ sign next to the terminal) ofthe two batteries using a special cable.
2) Connect the end of the second jumplead to the negative terminal (–) of theauxiliary battery with an earth point E onthe engine or gearbox of the vehicle to bestarted.
IMPORTANT Do not directly connect thenegative terminals of the two batteries: anysparks may ignite the detonating gas whichcould come out of the battery. If the auxil-iary battery is installed on another car, avoidmetal parts touching accidentally betweenthis car and the one with the flat battery.
3) Start the engine.
4) When the engine has started, removethe cables, reversing the sequence followedfor connection.
If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact the nearest Al-fa Romeo Authorised Service.
fig. 1
A0A0492m
Never use a batterycharger to start the engineas this could damage the
electronic systems of your vehicle,particularly the ignition and fuelsupply control units.
This starting proceduremust be carried out by
qualified personnel because incor-rect operations may cause electri-cal discharge of considerable in-tensity. The liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous and corrosive.Avoid contact with the skin andeyes. Keep naked flames and light-ed cigarettes away from the bat-tery and do not cause sparks.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
190
IMPORTANT The car is equipped with“Kit for tyre quick repair Fix&Go“, see theinstructions contained in the following chap-ter.
STARTING BY INERTIA IN THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE
Never push, tow or coaststart the vehicle. This couldcause fuel to flow into the
catalyst damaging it irreversibly.
Remember that the enginebrake and power steering
are not operational until the engineis started, therefore, much greatereffort than usual is needed on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.
WARNINGSignal the presence of thestationary vehicle according
to the current regulations: hazardwarning lights, reflecting triangle,etc. Any passengers should leavethe car.
WARNING
Should the type of wheelsused be changed (alloy
rims instead of steel), it is also nec-essary to replace the complete kitof fastening bolts with others ofsuitable size.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
191
FIX&GO KIT FORQUICK TYREREPAIRING
The car is equipped with a tyre quick re-pairing kit called FIX&GO.
fig. 11
A0A0374m
fig. 12
A0A0375m
fig. 13
A0A0376m
The quick repairing kit is placed in the bootinside the appropriate container (A-fig. 11).
The quick repairing kit includes (fig. 12):
– a tool (A) to remove the valve body;
– a compressor (B) with pressure gaugeand fittings;
– a bottle (C) containing sealer and fit-ted with a filling pipe;
– a “spout” (D) to be connected to thefilling pipe;
– a sticker bearing the notice “max 80km/h”, to be placed in a position visibleto the driver (on the instrument panel) af-ter fixing the tyre.
IMPORTANT In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, it is possible to fixtyres having cracks with maximum diame-ter up to 4 mm.
In (fig. 13) it is possible to identify:
A - tyre area which can be fixed (holesor cracks with diameter of max 4 mm);
B - areas which CANNOT be fixed.
Signal the presence of thestationary vehicle accord-
ing to the current regulations: haz-ard warning lights, reflecting tri-angle, etc.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
192
IT IS NECESSARYTO KNOW THAT:
The sealer included in the quick repairingkit, good for temperatures between –30°Ce +80°C, is not adequate for permanent fix-ing.
The liquid inside the tyre can be easily re-moved with water.
The sealer has no expire date.
It is not possible to fixcracks on the tyre sides
and permanent sealing of cracks onthe tread within 25 mm from thetyre side is not guaranteed.
WARNING
Do not use the quick re-pairing kit if the tyre is
damaged due to driving with thewheel flattened. That it is why itis necessary to check accurately thetyre sides.
WARNING
Do not operate the com-pressor for more than 20
minutes: risk of overheating!
WARNING
In case of damages to thewheel rim (the deformation
is such that there is an air leakage)or the tyre outside the limit areaspreviously indicated, fixing is notpossible. Do not remove foreignbodies (screws or nails) which havepenetrated the tyre.
WARNING
Warning! The bottle (C-fig.12) contains propylene gly-
col. This substance is toxic: do notswallow it and avoid contact withthe eyes, the skin and the clothes.In case of contact, rinse with abun-dant water. If any allergy reactionshould take place call a medical doc-tor. Keep the bottle cylinder in theappropriate compartment awayfrom heat and children.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
193
INFLATING PROCEDURE
– Place the wheel in the position illustratedin the figure (A-fig. 14) for the operationwith the valve, then engage the hand-brake.
– Screw the filling pipe (B-fig. 15) tothe bottle (C).
– Unscrew the tyre valve plug, remove theelement inside the valve by using the ap-propriate tool (D-fig. 16); be careful notto place it on the sand or on a dirty surface.
– Introduce the filling pipe (B-fig. 17)in the tyre valve, keep the bottle (C) withthe pipe directed downwards, then press thebottle so that the whole sealer can get intothe tyre.
– Screw again the element inside thevalve with the tool (D-fig. 18).
– Use the appropriate lever (E-fig. 19)to insert and clamp the air compressor pipe(F) to the tyre valve.
– Start the engine, insert the plug (G-fig. 20) in the lighter (or current socket,where fitted) and inflate the tyre accordingto the right pressure value (see “Cold infla-tion pressures” in the “Technical specifica-tion”). You are advised to check the tyrepressure value on the pressure gauge (H-fig. 19) with the compressor off, in orderto have a more accurate reading.
If it is not possible to reach the prescribedpressure, move the car forwards or back-wards for about 10 metres, so that the seal-er is distributed inside the tyre, then repeatinflation.
If, in spite of the last operation, the pre-scribed pressure is not achieved, do notmove the vehicle and contact Alfa RomeoAuthorized Services.
Once the correct tyre pressure has beenreached, start driving immediately so thatthe sealer is distributed evenly inside thetyre.
fig. 14
A0A0447m
fig. 15
A0A0378m
fig. 16
A0A0448m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
194 fig. 17
A0A0449m
fig. 18
A0A0450m
fig. 19
A0A0451m
After about 10 minutes, stop and checkthe tyre pressure once again; remember toengage the handbrake.
Place the sticker in a posi-tion where it can be clear-
ly seen by the driver as a noticethat the tyre has been treated withthe quick repairing kit. Drive care-fully especially in a bend. Do notovercome 80 km/h. Avoid suddenacceleration or braking.
WARNINGIf the pressure is below1,3 bars do not drive any
further: the quick repairing kit can-not guarantee proper hold becausethe tyre is too much damaged. Con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices.Conversely, if at least 1,3 bars are
detected, restore the correct pres-sure (with the engine running andthe handbrake engaged) and startdriving the car with great care.
WARNINGIf, during the pressure
restoring operation, it isnot possible to reach at least 1,8bars, do not drive any further be-cause the tyre is too much dam-aged and the quick repairing kitcannot guarantee proper hold. Con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorized Ser-vices.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
195
Drive carefully to the nearest Alfa RomeoAuthorized Service to check the tyre condi-tions, then have it fixed or replaced.
It is absolutely necessary to communicatethat the tyre has been fixed with the quickrepairing kit.
WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB
fig. 20
A0A0491m
Tyres fixed with the quickrepairing kit must be used
only temporarily.
WARNING
Halogen bulbs contain pres-surised gas, in the case of
breakage they may burst.
WARNING
Alterations or repairs tothe electric system not car-
ried out correctly and without tak-ing account of the system specifi-cations may cause failures and therisk of fire.
WARNING
Where possible, it is ad-visable to have bulbs
changed c/o Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services. The correct opera-tion and aiming of the outer lightsare vital to the safety of the ve-hicle and its passengers and thesubject of specific laws.
WARNING
Halogen bulbs must behandled touching only the
metallic part. If the transparentbulb is touched with the fingers, itslighting intensity is reduced and thelife of the bulb may be compro-mised. If touched accidentally, rubthe bulb with a cloth moistenedwith methylated spirit and allowto dry.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
196
D.-E. Halogen bulbsTo remove, free it from the clip onits housing.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
– When a light is not working, check thatthe corresponding fuse is intact beforechanging a bulb.
– For the location of fuses, refer to theparagraph “In the event of a burnt fuse”in this chapter.
– Before changing a bulb check the con-tacts for oxidation.
– Burnt bulbs must be replaced by oth-ers of the same type and power.
– Always check headlight aiming afterchanging a bulb to ensure they are safe.
TYPES OF BULBS (fig. 21)
Various types of bulbs are fitted to your ve-hicle:
A. All glass bulbsThese are pressed on. Pull to remove.
B. Bayonet type bulbsPress the bulb, turn counter-clockwiseto remove this type of bulb from itsholder.
C. Tubular bulbsFree them from their contacts to re-move.
fig. 21
A0A0453m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
197
BULBS
High beam
Low beam
Front sidelights
Foglight
Front direction indicators
Side direction indicators
Rear direction indicators
Rear sidelights - braking lights
Third stop (additional braking lights)
Reversing light
Rear fog guards
Number plate light
Puddle lights
Front roof light
Rear roof light
Courtesy mirror light
Glovebox light
Boot light
FIGURE 21
D
D
B
E
B
A
B
B
A
B
B
A
C
C
C
A
A
C
POWER
55W
55W
6W
55W
21W
5W
21W
5W/21W
2.3W
21W
21W
5W
5W
10W
10W
1.2W
5W
5W
TYPE
H7
H7
H6W
H1
H21W
W5W
P21W
P21/5W
W2.3W
P21W
P21W
W5W
C5W
C10W
C10W
W1.2W
W5W
C5W
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
198
The front light units contain the front side-light, dipped beam, main beam and foglight bulbs.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light unitas follows (fig. 22a):
(A) Main beam headlights
(B) Sidelights
(C) Xenon dipped beam headlights
(D) Fog lights.
Hereafter you will find, as information on-ly, the description of the correct procedureto replace a Xenon light.
To change the bulbs of the sidelights,dipped beams and main beams it is nec-essary to remove the cover (A-fig. 22b)releasing the locking screws (B).
To change the fog lights, remove the cov-er (C) turning it counter-clockwise.
After replacement, refitthe covers correctly check-ing that they are properly
secured.
IF AN EXTERIORLIGHT GOES OUT
XENON LIGHTS
Xenon lights have a very long life, there-fore breakdowns are unlikely.
fig. 22a
A0A0504m
fig. 22b
A0A0498m
If necessary, have the sys-tem checked and repaired
only by Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.
WARNING
Any operation regardingthe front light units shall be
carried out with the lights turnedoff and the ignition key removedfrom the ignition switch: risk ofelectric discharges.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
199
Front fog lights (fig. 23a)
IMPORTANT When needing to changethe left bulb, the side trim next to the lightitself needs to be removed to facilitate ac-cess to the engine compartment.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Remove the protective cover turning itcounter-clockwise.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Remove the bulb and replace it.
– Fit a new bulb, making the tab of themetal part coincide with the one on thelamp unit, then hook the bulb holder catch(B).
– Reconnect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
Xenon dipped beamheadlights (fig. 23b)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Remove the protective cover releasingthe locking screws.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A)turning it slightly counter-clockwise.
– Remove ring nut (B) turning it slightlycounter-clockwise
– Remove the bulb and replace it.
– Fit a new bulb correctly observing thegrooves on the lamp lens, then refit the ringnut (B).
– Reconnect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
Front sidelights (fig. 24a)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Remove the protective cover releasingthe locking screws.
– Using the extension (A), integral withthe bulb holder (B), withdraw the bulb hold-er itself which is snap-fitted.
– Remove the bulb (C), pushing it gen-tly and turning it counter-clockwise.
– Change the bulb and refit the bulb hold-er making sure that it clicks into place; al-so check that the bulb is in the correct po-sition looking at the lamp from outside.
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
fig. 23a
A0A0499m
fig. 23b
A0A0500m
fig. 24a
A0A0501m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
200
Main beam headlights(fig. 24b)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Remove the protective cover releasingthe locking screws.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Remove the bulb and replace it.
– Fit a new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooves onthe reflector, then hook the bulb holdercatch (B).
– Reconnect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
HALOGEN LIGHTS The front light units contain the dippedbeam, main beam and fog light bulbs.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light unitas follows (fig. 25a):
(A) Fog lights.
(B) Dipped beam headlights
(C) Sidelights.
(D) Main beam headlights
To change the bulbs of the sidelights, lowbeams and main beams it is necessary toremove the cover (A-fig. 25b) releasingthe catches (B).
To change the fog lights, remove the cov-er (C) turning counter-clockwise.
IMPORTANT See the previous chap-ter “When needing to change a bulb” forthe type of bulb and power rating.
fig. 25a
A0A0159m
fig. 25b
A0A0160m
fig. 24b
A0A0502m
Alterations or repairs tothe electric system not car-
ried out correctly and without tak-ing account of the system specifi-cations may cause failures and therisk of fire.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
201
After replacement, refitthe covers correctly check-ing that they are properly
secured.
IMPORTANT On the inside surface ofthe headlight there could appear a slightcoat of fogging; this does not show a de-fect, since it is a natural occurrence due tolow temperature and to the degree of hu-midity in the air; it will soon disappear assoon as the lights are turned on. The pres-ence of drops inside the headlight showswater seepage, refer to the Alfa RomeoDealership.
Fog lights (fig. 26a)
IMPORTANT When needing to changethe left bulb, the side trim next to the lightitself needs to be removed to facilitate ac-cess to the engine compartment.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Remove the protective cover turningcounter-clockwise.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Remove the bulb and replace it.
– Fit a new bulb, making the tab of themetal part coincide with the one on thelamp unit, then hook the bulb holder catch(B).
– Re-connect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
Dipped beam headlights(fig. 26b)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Remove the protective cover releasingthe catches.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Remove the bulb and replace it.
– Fit a new bulb, Fit a new bulb, mak-ing the tabs of the metallic part coincidewith the grooves on the reflector, then hookthe bulb holder catch (B).
– Re-connect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
fig. 26a
A0A0161m
fig. 26b
A0A0162m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
202
FRONT DIRECTIONINDICATORS (fig. 28-29)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Work in the point shown by the arrowin order to compress the internal clip (A),then remove the lens. To do this use the flat-bladed screwdriver provided, protect the tipwith a soft cloth to avoid damaging the car.
– Turn the bulb holder (B) clockwise andremove it from the lens unit.
fig. 28
A0A0454m
Front side lights (fig. 27a)
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Remove the protective cover releasingthe catches
– Using the extension (A) integral withthe bulb holder (B), withdraw the bulb hold-er itself which is snap-fitted.
– Remove the bulb (C), pushing gentlyand turning counter-clockwise.
– Change the bulb and re-insert the bulbholder making sure that it clicks into place;also check that the bulb is in the correct po-sition looking at the lamp from outside.
– Refit the corrective cover correctly.
Main-beam headlights(fig. 27b)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Remove the protective cover releasingthe catches.
– Disconnect the electric connector (A).
– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Remove the bulb and replace it.
– Fit a new bulb, Fit a new bulb, mak-ing the tabs of the metallic part coincidewith the grooves on the reflector, then hookthe bulb holder catch (B).
– Re-connect the electric connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
fig. 27b
A0A0164m
fig. 27a
A0A0342m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
203
– Remove the bulb pushing it gently andturning it counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb.
– Refit the bulb holder turning clockwiseand checking that it is secured correctly.
SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS(fig. 30)
– Push the transparent cover towards therear of the car to compress the catch (A).Release the front part and remove this unit.
– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(B) and remove it from the cover.
– Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replaceit.
– Insert the bulb holder (B) in the trans-parent cover, then position the unit mak-ing sure the catch clicks into place (A).
REVERSING LIGHTSAND REAR FOG GUARDS(fig. 31-32)
The reversing light and rear fog guard arein the tail light unit fastened to the tailgate;they are to be found respectively one on theright and the other on the left of the vehiclefacing forwards.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– Open the tailgate.
– Remove the cap (A) then, using the ex-tension with the screwdriver provided (work-ing as illustrated), loosen the fastening nuts(B) of the light unit concerned.
fig. 31
A0A0167m
fig. 29
A0A0455m
fig. 30
A0A0166m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
204
– Withdraw the light unit outwards.
– Slacken the electric connector (C).
– Slacken the screws (D), and removethe bulb holder.
– Remove the bulb pushing gently andturning counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb, then refit the bulbholder and tighten the screws (D).
– Re-tighten the electric connector (C).
– Refit the light unit on the tailgate tight-ening the nuts (B) then refit the cap (A)pressing it on.
REAR DIRECTION INDICATORSREAR SIDELIGHTS-BRAKINGLIGHT (fig. 33-34)
The rear direction indicators and the sidelight-braking light are in the tail light unit fas-tened to the body.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
– From inside the boot, open the pre-formed trim (A) then, using the extensionand the screwdriver provided (working as il-lustrated) slacken the nuts (B) fasteningthe light unit.
– Withdraw the light unit outwards.
– Disconnect the electric connector (C).
– Slacken the screw (D), and remove thebulb holder.
– Remove the bulb to be changed push-ing gently and turning counter-clockwise:(E) - bulb for rear sidelight-braking light.(F) - bulb for rear direction indicators.
– Replace the bulb, then refit the bulbholder and tighten the screw (D).
– Re-connect the electric connector (C).
– Refit the light unit on the body tighten-ing the screws (B).
– Close the preformed trim (A).
fig. 35
A0A0170m
fig. 34
A0A0169m
fig. 33
A0A0168m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
205
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS (fig. 35)
To change the bulbs proceed as follows:
– Work on the transparent cover frame,in the point shown by the arrow to compressthe catch (B). Free the opposite end and re-move the unit.
– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise(A) and remove it from the transparent cov-er.
– Remove the snap-fitted bulb and replaceit.
– Insert the bulb holder (A) in the trans-parent cover then refit the unit checking thatthe catch clicks into place (B).
ADDITIONAL BRAKING LIGHT (THIRD STOP) (fig. 36-37)
To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:
– Open the tailgate, slacken the screws(A) then disconnect the electric connector(B).
– Remove the transparent cover-bulb hold-er (C) from the support (D).
– Working on the side catches (E), re-move the bulb holder.
– Remove the bulb to be changed.
– Insert the bulb holder making sure thecatches click into place (E).
– Refit the transparent cover-bulb holder(C) in the support (D).
– Re-connect the electric connector (B).
– Refit the unit on the tailgate tighteningthe screws (A).
fig. 37
A0A0173m
fig. 35
A0A0171m
fig. 36
A0A0172m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
206
PUDDLE LIGHT (fig. 38)(for versions/markets where applicable)
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
– Open the door and slacken the screw(A) fastening the transparent covers.
– Remove the unit composed of the twotransparent covers then change the bulb, re-leasing it from the side contacts making surethat the new bulb is correctly clamped be-tween the contacts.
– Realign the two transparent covers andtighten the fastening screw (A).
IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT GOES OUT
FRONT ROOF LIGHT (fig. 39-40)
To change the bulbs proceed as follows:
– Remove the light unit (A) levering inthe points shown by the arrow (in corre-spondence with the retainer catches).
– Open the protective cover (B).
– Replace the bulb concerned releasing itfrom the side contacts making sure that thenew bulb is correctly clamped between thecontacts.
– Close the protective cover (B).
– Refit the light unit pressing gently in cor-respondence with the retainer catches, un-til hearing the click.
fig. 40
A0A0176m
fig. 39
A0A0175m
fig. 38
A0A0174m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
207
REAR ROOF LIGHT (fig. 41-42)
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
– Remove the light unit (A) levering inthe point shown by the arrow.
– Replace the bulb releasing it from theside contacts making sure that the new bulbis correctly clamped between the contacts.
– Refit the light unit in the correct positioninserting first the side with the connector,then pressing the other side until the catchclicks into place (B).
COURTESY MIRROR LIGHT (fig. 43-44)
To change a bulb proceed as follows:
– Open the mirror cover (A).
– Remove the transparent cover (B) lev-ering in the point shown by the arrow.
– Gently raise the bulb holder (C) from itshousing, remove the snap-fitted bulb andchange it.
– Put the bulb holder correctly (C) backin its housing.
– Refit the transparent cover (B) insert-ing it in its correct position firstly on one endand then on the other until it clicks intoplace.
fig. 41
A0A0177m
fig. 42
A0A0178m
fig. 43
A0A0179m
fig. 44
A0A0180m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
208
GLOVEBOX LIGHT (fig. 45-46)
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
– Open the glovebox, then remove thelight unit (A) levering in the point shown bythe arrow.
– Open the protection (B) and change thesnap-fitted bulb.
– Close the protection (B) on the trans-parent cover.
– Refit the light unit inserting it in its cor-rect position firstly on one end and then onthe other until it clicks into plac.
BOOT LIGHT (fig. 47-48)
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
– Open the tailgate.
– Remove the light unit (A) levering inthe point shown by the arrow.
– Open the protective cover (B) and re-place the bulb releasing it from the side con-tacts, making sure that the new bulb is cor-rectly clamped between the contacts.
– Close the protective cover again (B).
– Refit the light unit inserting it in its cor-rect position firstly on one end and then onthe other until it clicks into plac.
fig. 45
A0A0181m
fig. 46
A0A0182m
fig. 47
A0A0183m
fig. 48
A0A0184m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
209
IN THE EVENT OF A BLOWN FUSE
GENERAL
The fuse is a protective device for the elec-tric system: it comes into action (i.e. it cutsoff) mainly due to a fault or improper actionon the system.
When a device does not work, check theefficiency of its fuse. The conductor element(A-fig. 49) must be intact; if not, replacethe fuse with one of the same amp rating(same colour).
(B) - Undamaged fuse
(C) - Fuse with damaged filament.
Remove the blown fuse using the pincer pro-vided (D), in the control box.
fig. 49
A0A0185m
Never replace a fuse withmetal wires or anythingelse. Always use an intact
fuse of the same colour.
Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp
rating, DANGER OF FIRE.
WARNINGIf a fuse blows again, con-tact an Alfa Romeo Autho-
rised Service.
WARNING
If a general fuse (MAXI-FUSE or MEGA-FUSE) cuts
in, do not attempt any repair andcontact an Alfa Romeo AuthorisedService.
WARNING
Before replacing a fuse,make sure the ignition key
has been removed and that all theother services are switched offand/or disengaged.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
210
The fuses of the Alfa 147 GTA aregrouped in three control boxes, to be foundrespectively on the dashboard, on the batterypositive pole and next to the actual battery.
Access is gained to the control box on thedashboard by slackening the two retainers(A-fig. 50) and removing the protectivetrim (B).
To access the fuses in the control unit onthe battery pole, it is necessary operate inthe direction shown by the arrows on theblocking devices (A-fig. 51) and thenopen the 2 covers (B).
To access the fuses of the control unit lo-cated near the battery, it is necessary to op-erate in the opposite way on the retainingdevices (C), and then remove cover (D).
To locate the protection fuses, consultingthe summary table on the following pages,refer to the following illustrations fig. 52,fig. 53 and 54.
fig. 50
A0A0186m
fig. 52 - Control box on dashboard
A0A0134mfig. 51
A0A0493m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
211fig. 53 - Control box next to battery fig. 54 - Control box on battery positive pole
A0A0494m A0A0495m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
212
Hazard warning light
Right dipped-beam headlight
Left dipped-beam headlight
Main-beam headlight
Foglight
Braking light
Reversing light
+30 direction indicators
10
10
10
15
15
10
7.5
10
F53
F12
F13
F2
F30
F37
F35
F53
52
52
52
53
53
52
52
52
LIGHTS FIGURE FUSE AMPERES
FUSE SUMMARY TABLE
30
30
10
7.5
15
7.5
7.5
IGN (MAXI-FUSE)
F13
F31
F39
F1
F31
54
54
52
52
52
53
52
SERVICES FIGURE FUSE AMPERES
Selespeed transmission pump
Ignition switch
Headlight aiming device
Climate control system
Climate control system
Climate control compressor
Heater unit relay coils
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
213
15
7.5
7.5
15
15
15
20
20
30
30
20
15
7.5
7.5
20
20
15
7.5
15
7.5
F32
F11
F51
F39
F39
F52
F33
F34
F40
F43
F44
F45
F41
F35
F38
F5
F39
F8
F9
F49
52
53
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
53
52
53
53
52
SERVICES FIGURE FUSE AMPERES
Key-operated +30
Selespeed transmission
Selespeed transmission
Radio
Navigator
Rearscreen wiper
Left rear power window
Right rear power window
Rearscreen heating
Windscreen - rearscreen washer (two-way pump)
Cigar lighter
Seats with electric heating
Heated wing mirrors - heated nozzles
Cruise control
Central door locking
Headlight washer
Services + 30
Primary services (electronic injection)
Secondary services (electronic injection)
Secondary services
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
214
Volumetric sensors
VDC system sensor
Steering angle sensor
EOBD system diagnosis socket
Cell phone provision
Driver’s door control unit supply
Passenger’s door control unit supply
Controls lighting
Climate control system controls lighting
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Driver’s door control unit
ABS control unit
ABS control unit
Dashboard control box
Boot control unit
Air - bag control unit
Electronic injection control unit +30
Dashboard control unit
15
7.5
7.5
15
15
20
20
7.5
7.5
10
10
15
7.5
50
50
15
7.5
7.5
70
F39
F42
F42
F39
F39
F47
F48
F49
F35
F37
F53
F39
F42
ABS (MAXI-FUSE)
CPL2 (MAXI-FUSE)
F39
F50
F6
CPL1 (MAXI-FUSE)
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
54
54
52
52
53
54
SERVICES FIGURE FUSE AMPERES
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
215
40
40
40
15
15
25
7.5
15
15
20
15
15
7.5
30
50
A/C (MAXI-FUSE)
FAN1 (MAXI-FUSE)
FAN2 (MAXI-FUSE)
F3
F4
F60 (*)
F11
F61 (*)
F62 (*)
F63 (*)
F46
F10
F12
EFI (MAXI-FUSE)
JB3 (MAXI-FUSE)
54
54
54
53
53
52
53
52
52
52
52
53
53
54
54
SERVICES FIGURE FUSE AMPERES
(*) Fuse behind dashboard control box on an auxiliary bracket.
Climate control fan
Radiator fan
Radiator fan
Horn
Fuel pump
Tailgate electric unlocking
Electronic injection system
Bose system
Bose system
Sunroof
Sun roof
Petrol/ignition coil injectors
Services
Electronic injection
Engine compartment fuse carrier module
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
216
IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT BATTERY
Before anything else, you are advised toread the precautions for preventing the bat-tery from draining and for ensuring long lifein the “Vehicle maintenance” chapter.
CHARGING THE BATTERY
IMPORTANT The battery charging pro-cedure is described only for information pur-poses. This operation should be carried outby Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
Charging should be slow at a low amp rat-ing for 24 hours. Charging for a longer timemay damage the battery.
Charge the battery as follows:
– Disconnect the battery negative termi-nal (–).
– Connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminals ensuring that the bias is cor-rect.
– Turn on the charger.
– After charging, turn off the charger be-fore disconnecting it from the battery.
– Re-connect the battery negative termi-nal (–).
STARTING WITH ANAUXILIARY BATTERY
See “Starting with an auxiliary battery” inthis chapter.
Strictly avoid using a bat-tery charger to start theengine: you may damage
the electronic systems, in particu-lar the ignition and fuel supply con-trol units.
The liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous and
corrosive. Avoid contact with theskin or eyes. The battery should becharged in a well ventilated place,away from naked flames or pos-sible sources of sparks: danger ofexplosion and fire.
WARNING
Do not attempt to charge afrozen battery: it must
firstly be thawed, otherwise itmay burst. If freezing has occurred,the battery should be checked byskilled personnel to make sure thatthe internal elements are not dam-aged and that the body is notcracked, with the risk of leakingpoisonous and corrosive acid.
WARNING
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
217
IF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE TOWED
The tow ring supplied with the vehicle ishoused in the tool box under the boot mat.
Front towing
To install the tow ring, proceed as follows:
– Take the tow ring from the tool box.
– Remove the cover (A) snap-fitted onthe front bumper (fig. 55). To do this usethe flat-bladed screwdriver provided, protectthe tip with a soft cloth to avoid damagingthe car.
– Firmly screw the ring in its housing.
Back towing
To install the tow ring, just screw the ringfirmly in its housing (fig. 56).
fig. 55
A0A0456m
fig. 56
A0A0457m
Before tightening the ringcarefully clean the thread-
ed housing. Before beginning totow the car, make sure that thering is firmly tightened in itsthreaded housing.
WARNING
Do not start the enginewhen towing the car. Before
starting to tow, turn the ignition keyto MAR and back to STOP againwithout removing it. Removing thekey automatically engages thesteering lock resulting in the impos-sibility to steer the wheels. Whentowing remember that without thehelp of the engine brake and pow-er steering greater effort is requiredon the pedal and steering wheel. Donot use flexible cables for towingand avoid jerks. During towing op-erations make sure that fasteningthe joint to the car does not damagethe components in contact with it.When towing the car, it is compul-sory to follow specific traffic regu-lations concerning both the towingdevice and behaviour on the road.
WARNING
Take care when position-ing the arms of the lift orworkshop lift to avoid
damaging the side strips.
fig. 57
A0A0458m
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
218
USING AN ARM LIFT ORWORKSHOP LIFT
The vehicle should be lifted only at the sidesetting the ends of the arms or the work-shop lift in the area shown in fig. 57.
IF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE LIFTED
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
219
IN THE EVENTOF AN ACCIDENT
– It is important to keep calm.
– If you are not directly involved, stop atleast a few dozen metres away from the ac-cident.
– On motorways, stop without blockingthe emergency lane.
– Turn the engine off and the hazard warn-ing lights on.
– At night, illuminate the place of the ac-cident with the headlights.
– Take care, do not risk being run over.
– Signal the accident placing the triangleat regulation distance in a clearly visibleplace.
– Call the emergency organisation, givingthe most accurate information possible. Onmotorways use the special phones provid-ed.
– In motorway pileups, especially withpoor visibility, the risk of being involved inother crashes is high. Leave the car imme-diately and go beyond the guard-rail.
– If the doors are blocked, do not try toget out of the car breaking the windscreenwhich is stratified. The windows and rearscreen are easier to break.
– Remove the ignition key of the vehi-cles involved.
– If you note a smell of fuel or other chem-ical products, do not smoke and have ciga-rettes stubbed out.
– To put out fires, even small ones, usethe extinguisher, blankets, sand, or earth.Never use water.
– If use of the lighting system is not nec-essary, disconnect the battery negative ter-minal (–).
IN A
N E
MER
GEN
CY
220
IF PEOPLE ARE INJURED
– An injured person must never be aban-doned. Helping is compulsory also for per-sons not directly involved in the accident.
– Do not crowd around injured people.
– Reassure the injured person that helpis on the way, and stay near to overcomeany panic.
– Release or cut the seat belt restraininginjured persons.
– Do not give injured persons anythingto drink.
– An injured person should never bemoved except in the following circum-stances.
– Remove an injured person from the caronly in danger of fire, sinking or falling.When removing an injured person: do notpull the limbs or bend the head and keepthe body as horizontal as possible.
FIRST AID KIT
It is advisable to have also a fire extin-guisher and a blanket besides the first-aidkit.
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
221
It is however wise to remember that Pro-grammed Maintenance does not complete-ly cover all the car’s requirements: also inthe initial period before the 20,000 km ser-vice coupon and later, between one couponand another, ordinary care is still necessarysuch as for example routinely checking andtopping up the level of fluids, checking thetyre pressure, etc...
IMPORTANT The Programmed Mainte-nance coupons are specified by the Manu-facturer. The failure to have them carried outmay invalidate the warranty.
The Programmed Maintenance service iscarried out by all Alfa Romeo Authorised Ser-vices, at pre-established times.
If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for fur-ther replacements or repairs, these may becarried out only with the explicit agreementof the customer.
IMPORTANT You are advised to contactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services in the eventof any minor operating faults, without wait-ing for the next service coupon.
SCHEDULEDSERVICING
Correct maintenance is determinate in en-suring long vehicle life under the best con-ditions.
This is why Alfa Romeo has programmeda series of checks and maintenance opera-tions every 20,000 km.
IMPORTANT On versions fitted with re-configurable multifunction display, at 2000km from the maintenance deadline, the dis-play will show “REFER TO SERVICE MANU-AL” which is shown again turning the igni-tion key to MAR, every 200 km. For fur-ther details, see “Service” in the “Recon-figurable multifunction display” paragraph.
VVEEHHIICCLLEE MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ●
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
222
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180Thousands of km
Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if necessary
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc..)
Check operation of windscreen washer system, adjust spray jets
Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades
Check operation of front disk brake pad wear indicator
Check wear conditions of rear disk brake pads
Sight check the conditions of: body exterior, underbody protection, stiff pipes andhoses (exhaust - fuel supply - brakes), rubber parts (boots - sleeves - bushes etc..)
Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication
Sight check for accessory poly-V drive belt
Check handbrake lever stroke adjustment
Check antievaporation system
Change air cleaner cartridge
Top up fluid levels (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc..)
Check and if necessary top up the Selespeed automatic transmission oil level
Sight check for conditions of timing gear drive toothed belt
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
223
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180Thousands of km
Change timing gear drive belt (*)
Change accessory Poly-V drive belt
Change spark plugs
Check operation of engine control system (through diagnosis socket)
Check mechanical transmission and differential oil level
Change engine oil
Change engine oil filter
Change brake fluid (or every 2 years)
Change pollen filer (or once a year)
Check emissions/smoke at the exhaust
●
●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ● ●
(*) Or every 3 years for harsh conditions (cold climates, city driving or prolonged lengths of time at idle speed, dusty areas)Or every 5 years, regardless of mileage.
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
224
ADDITIONALOPERATIONS
Every 1000 km or before long journeys,check and if necessary top up:
– engine coolant fluid level
– brake/hydraulic clutch control fluid level
– power steering fluid level
– windscreen/rearscreen and headlampwasher fluid level
– tyre pressure and conditions.
Every 3000 km check and if necessarytop up the engine oil level.
The use of products of the FL Selenia isrecommended which have been designedand made expressly for Alfa Romeo cars(see “Refuelling” in the “Technical Specifi-cations” chapter).
ANNUAL INSPECTIONPROGRAMME
For cars with an annual mileageof below 20,000 km (for exampleabout 10,000 km) the followingyearly inspection programme is ad-vised:
– Check tyre conditions/wear and if nec-essary adjust the pressure
– Check operation of lighting system(headlights, direction indicators, hazardwarning lights, boot, passenger compart-ment, glovebox lights, warning lights )
– Check operation of windscreen wipersystem, spray jet adjustment
– Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades
– Check front disk brake pad conditionsand wear
– Check for bonnet and boot lock clean-ness, lever cleanness and lubrication
– Sight check for conditions of: engine,gearbox, transmission, pipes (exhaust - fu-el supply - brakes) rubber parts (boots -sleeves - bushes etc..), brake and fuel sup-ply system hoses
– Check battery charge
– Sight check for conditions of various dri-ve belts
– Check and if necessary top up fluid lev-els (engine coolant, brakes, windscreenwasher, battery, etc...)
– Change engine oil
– Change engine oil filter
– Change pollen filter.
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
225
IMPORTANT Engine oil
Should prevailing use of the car be underone of the following specially heavy condi-tions:
– trailer or caravan towing
– dusty roads
– frequently idling engines or long distancelow speed driving or in case of a long terminactivity
– short distances (less than 7-8 km) re-peated and with external temperatures be-low zero replace engine oil more frequent-ly than required on Service Schedule.
IMPORTANT Air cleaner
Using the car on dusty roads change theair cleaner more frequently than specified inthe Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
For any doubts concerning the intervals be-tween engine oil and air cleaner replacementin relation to how the vehicle is used, con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
IMPORTANT Battery
It is advisable to check the battery charge,preferably at the onset of winter, to preventthe possibility of the electrolyte freezing.
This check should be carried out more fre-quently if the car is used mainly for shorttrips, or if it is fitted with accessories thatpermanently absorb electricity even with theignition key removed, especially in the caseof after market accessories.
If the vehicle is used in hot climates or par-ticularly harsh conditions it is wise to checkthe level of the battery fluid (electrolyte)more frequently than specified in the Sched-uled Maintenance Programme.
Vehicle maintenance shouldbe entrusted to Alfa RomeoAuthorised Services. For
routine and minor maintenance op-erations you wish to carry out your-self, always make sure you have theproper equipment, genuine AlfaRomeo spares and the necessary flu-ids;do not however carry out theseoperations if you have no experi-ence.
IMPORTANT Pollen filter
If the vehicle is used frequently in dusty orheavily polluted environments it is advisableto replace the filtering element more fre-quently; in particular it should be replacedif a reduction of the amount of air admittedto the passenger compartment is noted.
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
226
A0A0405m
fig. 1
CHECKING LEVELS
1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid - 4 Power steering fluid - 5 Windscreen/rearscreen/head-lamp washer fluid - 6 Engine coolant fluid
When topping up takecare not to confuse the var-ious types of fluids: they
are all incompatible with one an-other and could seriously damagethe vehicle.
Never smoke while work-ing in the engine compart-
ment; gas and inflammable vapoursmay be present, with the risk offire.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
227
Used engine oil and filtercontain harmful substancesfor the environment. Con-
tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Ser-vices, to have the oil and filterchanged as they are equipped todispose of the waste oil and filtersrespecting nature and the law.
ENGINE OIL (fig. 3)
The engine oil should be checked with thevehicle on a level surface a few minutes(about 5) after the engine has beenswitched off.
Remove the dipstick (A) clean it, put itback in completely, remove it and check thatthe level is within the MIN and MAXmarks on the dipstick. The interval betweenthe MIN and MAX marks corresponds toabout one litre of oil.
If the oil level is near or even below theMIN mark, add oil through the filler neck(B), until reaching the MAX mark.
IMPORTANT If a routine check revealsthat the level is above the MAX mark, con-tact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services to havethe correct level restored.
IMPORTANT After topping up the oil,before checking the level again, run the en-gine a few seconds and wait for a few min-utes after stopping it.
Engine oil consumption
Max engine oil consumption is usually 400grams every 1000 km.
During the initial period of use the enginesettles, therefore engine oil consumptionmay be considered stabilised only after thefirst 5000 ÷ 6000 km.
IMPORTANT Engine oil consumption de-pends on the way of driving and the condi-tions of use of the vehicle.
fig. 3
A0A0406m
Do not add oil with spec-ifications (classification,viscosity) other than those
of the oil already in the engine.
When the engine is hot,take care when working
inside the engine compartment toavoid burns. Remember that whenthe engine is hot, the fan may cutin: danger of injury.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
228
SELESPEED TRANSMISSIONOIL (fig. 4)
The Selespeed transmission oil should bechecked with the vehicle on a level surfaceand with the engine stopped and cold.
To check the level, proceed as follows:
– turn the ignition key to MAR;
– disconnect the breather tube and re-move the cap (A) checking that the levelcorresponds with the MAX mark on the dip-stick integrated with the cap;
– if the oil is below the MAX mark, topup to reach the correct level;
– after refitting the cap, insert the breathertube firmly on the housing on the cap andturn the ignition key to STOP.
Used gearbox oil containsdangerous substances forthe environment. For chang-
ing the oil we advise contacting Al-fa Romeo Authorised Services whoare equipped for disposing of usedoil respecting nature and the law.
Do not add oil with spec-ifications other than thatalready in the gearbox.
fig. 4
A0A00197m
Be very careful working in-side the engine compart-
ment if the engine is hot: danger ofburns. Remember that the fan maycut in if the engine is very hot: dan-ger of injury.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
229
POWER STEERING FLUID(fig. 6)
Check that the level of the oil in the reser-voir is at maximum.
This operation should be carried out withthe vehicle on a level surface and the en-gine switched off and cold.
Check that the level reaches the MAXmark on the reservoir or coincides with theupper notch (maximum level) on the dip-stick (A) integral with the reservoir cap.
The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,replace the cap only with
another genuine one, otherwisesystem efficiency could be compro-mised.
Top up only with the samefluid contained in the cool-ing circuit. PARAFLU UP
(red) cannot be mixed withPARAFLU 11 (blue) or with otherfluids. Should this take place, donot start the engine and contact Al-fa Romeo Authorized Service.
fig. 6
A0A0407m
ENGINE COOLANT FLUID (fig. 5)
The level of the coolant in the header tank(reservoir) should be checked with the en-gine cold and the car on a level surface andit should be between the MIN and MAXmarks on the tank.
If the level is low, loosen the header tankcap (A) and slowly pour a mixture of thefluid specified in the ”Fluids and lubricants”table in section “Technical Specifications”,through the filler neck until nearing theMAX mark; have this operation carried outat Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
fig. 5
A0A0240m
The antifreeze mixture contained in thecooling circuit guarantees protection downto –40°C.
Do not remove the capwhen the engine is hot:
danger of burns.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
230
If the oil level in the reservoir is below thespecified one, top up only with one of theproducts listed in the “Fluids and lubricants”table in the “Technical Specifications” chap-ter proceeding as follows.
– Start the engine and wait for the oil lev-el in the reservoir to stabilise.
– With the engine running, turn the steer-ing wheel lock to lock a few times.
– Top up to the MAX level notch, thenrefit the cap. Oil consumption is very
low, if topping up again isneeded shortly afterwards,
have the system checked for pos-sible leaks by Alfa Romeo Autho-rised Services.
BRAKE AND HYDRAULICCLUTCH FLUID (fig. 7)
Slacken the cap (A) and check that thefluid contained in the reservoir reaches themaximum mark.
fig. 7
A0A0408m
When loosening thereservoir cap do not allowthe fluid to come into con-
tact with painted parts. If it does,wash it off immediately with wa-ter.
Do not allow the powersteering fluid to touch hot
parts of the engine: it is inflam-mable.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
231
To avoid damaging thepump motor, do not use the windscreen/rearscreen
washers when the reservoir is empty.IMPORTANT Brake and hydraulic clutch
fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture).For this reason, if the car is mainly used inareas with a high degree of atmospheric hu-midity, the fluid should be replaced at morefrequent intervals than specified in theScheduled Maintenance Programme.
WINDSCREEN/REARSCREEN/HEADLIGHT WASHER FLUID(fig. 8)
Open the cap (A) and check the level inthe reservoir.
If necessary top up using a mixture of wa-ter and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 fluid as follows:
– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 70% water in summer;
– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 50% water in winter;
– in the case of temperatures below -20°Cuse TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35fluid neat.
fig. 8
A0A0242m
The π symbol on the con-tainer indicates synthetic
brake fluid, distinguishing it fromthe mineral kind. Using mineral flu-ids irreversibly damages the spe-cial braking system rubber seals.
WARNING
Brake and clutch fluid ispoisonous and highly cor-
rosive. In the event of accidentalcontact, wash the parts concernedimmediately with neutral soap andwater, then rinse thoroughly. Seea doctor at once if the fluid is swal-lowed.
WARNING
Do not travel with thewindscreen washer reser-
voir empty: the action of the wind-screen washer is fundamental forimproving vision.
WARNING
Some commercial additivesfor windscreen washers
are inflammable. The engine com-partment contains hot componentswhich may set it on fire.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
232
AIR CLEANER
The air cleaner is connected to the tem-perature and air flow sensors which sendto the control unit the electric signals need-ed for correct operation of the injection andignition system.
It must therefore always be in perfect con-ditions, to ensure correct operation of theengine, low consumption and exhaust emis-sion levels.
If the operations concern-ing cleaner replacementare not carried out correct-
ly and with the due precautions,they may compromise the travel-ling safety of the vehicle. You arerecommended to have this opera-tion carried out by Alfa Romeo Au-thorised Services.
Any attempt to clean thecleaner may damage it,leading to serious engine
damage.
If the car is habituallyused in dusty areas, thecleaner should be replaced
at shorter intervals than thosespecified in the Programmed Main-tenance Schedule.
POLLEN FILTER
This has a mechanical/electrostatic air fil-tering action, provided that the windows anddoors are shut.
Have the dust/pollen filter checked oncea year by Alfa Romeo Authorised Services,preferably at the onset of summer.
If the car is mainly used in dusty or heav-ily polluted areas, the filter should bechanged at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the Scheduled Maintenance Pro-gramme.
IMPORTANT The failure to replace thepollen filter can considerably reduce the ef-fectiveness of the climate control system.
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
233fig. 10
A0A0393m
BATTERY
The battery is of the “Limited Mainte-nance” type and is fitted with an optical in-dicator (A-fig. 9) for checking the elec-trolyte level and charge.
Under normal conditions of use the elec-trolyte does not need topping up with distilledwater. To make sure that it is in efficient con-ditions, at routine intervals check the indica-tor on the battery cover which should be darkin colour with a green central area.
If the indicator is a bright light colour, ordark without the green central area, contactAlfa Romeo Authorised Services.
fig. 9
A0A0224m
Batteries contain harmfulsubstances for the environ-ment. To change the bat-
tery we advise contacting AlfaRomeo Authorised Services whoare equipped for disposal respect-ing nature and the law.
The incorrect installationof electric accessories maycause serious damage to
the vehicle. If after buying the caryou wish to install accessories(alarm, radio, radiotelephone etc.)contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices who will be able to sug-gest the most suitable devices andabove all advise about the need touse a more powerful battery.
If the car is to remain in-active for a long time invery cold conditions, re-
move the battery and take it to awarm place, otherwise it mayfreeze.
The liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous and
corrosive. Avoid contact with theskin or eyes. The battery should becharged in a well ventilated placeaway from naked flames or pos-sible sources of sparks: danger ofexplosion and fire.
WARNING
When working on the bat-tery or near to it, always
protect the eyes with goggles.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
234
CHARGING THE BATTERY
IMPORTANT The battery charging pro-cedure is described only for information pur-poses. This operation should be carried outby Alfa Romeo Authorised Services.
Charging should be slow at a low amp rat-ing for 24 hours. Charging for a longer timemay damage the battery.
Charge the battery as follows:
– Disconnect the battery negative termi-nal (–).
– Connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminals ensuring that the bias is cor-rect.
– Turn on the charger.
CHECKING THE CHARGE
The battery charge may be checked satis-factorily using the indicator, and acting ac-cording to the colour the indicator shows.
Refer to the table below or to the label (fig. 10) on the battery itself.
Brilliantwhite colour
Dark colour without green area in the centre
Dark colour with green area in the centre
Top up the electrolyte
Low charge level
Sufficient electrolyte level and charge
Contact Authorised Alfa Romeo Services
Charge the battery (you are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorised Services)
No action
– After charging, turn off the charger be-fore disconnecting it from the battery.
– Re-connect the battery negative termi-nal (–).
IMPORTANT If the battery is kept witha charge of below 50% it is damaged by sul-phation, its starting capability is reduced andit is also more subject to the possibility offreezing (this may occur already at -10 °C).In the event of prolonged inactivity, referto the paragraph “Vehicle inactivity”, in thechapter “Correct use of the car”.
Never attempt to charge afrozen battery: it must
firstly be thawed, otherwise itmay burst. If freezing has occurred,the battery should be checked be-fore charging by specialised per-sonnel, to make sure that the in-ternal elements are not damagedand that the body is not cracked,with the risk of leaking poisonousand corrosive acid.
WARNING
Working with a low fluidlevel may damage the bat-
tery irreversibly, even causing it toburst.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
235
You are also reminded that services withhigh current absorption switched on by theuser, such as for example: baby bottle warm-ers, vacuum cleaner, mobile phone, minifridge, etc., quicken the battery drainingprocess if they are turned on withthe engine off or running at idle speed.
IMPORTANT When installing addition-al systems on the vehicle, bear in mind thatimproper branches on connections of the ve-hicle wiring are dangerous, particularly ifsafety devices are involved.
Battery
60 Ah
70 Ah
Maximum permissible loadless absorption
36 mA
42 mA
The maximum absorption of all the ac-cessories (standard and fitted afterwards)should be 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery), asshown in the following table:
CHANGING THE BATTERY
When changing the battery it should be re-placed with another original one with thesame characteristics. If it is replaced by abattery with different characteristics, themaintenance intervals given in the Sched-uled Maintenance Programme in this chap-ter are no longer valid and for maintenanceit will be necessary to follow the batteryManufacturer’s instructions.
USEFUL HINTS TO EXTEND THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY
To avoid rapidly draining the battery andensure that it continues to work correctly,the following should be noted:
– The terminals must always be firmlytightened.
– Within reason, avoid using electrical de-vices for a long time when the engine isswitched off (radio, hazard warning lights,parking lights, etc.).
– When the vehicle is parked in a garage,ensure that the doors, bonnet, boot and in-ner lids are closed properly so that the lightsdo not stay on permanently.
– Before carrying out any work on theelectric system, disconnect the negative ca-ble from the battery.
– If after buying the car, you wish to in-stall electric accessories which require a per-manent electric supply (alarm, voice feature,radionavigator with satellite antitheft func-tion etc.) or accessories that burden the elec-tric system, contact Alfa Romeo Authorisedservices whose qualified personnel, in ad-dition to suggesting the most suitable de-vices belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,will evaluate the overall electric absorption,checking whether the vehicle’s electric sys-tem is capable of withstanding the load re-quired, or whether it should be integratedwith a more powerful battery. In fact, assome of these devices continue absorbingenergy even when the ignition key is off (carstationary, engine off), they gradually drainthe battery.
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
236
– Do not check for current in the cables byshort-circuiting the ends.
– If electric welding is to be carried out onthe body, remember to disconnect the elec-tronic control units, or remove them if thework involves high temperatures.
ELECTRONICCONTROL UNITS
With normal use of the vehicle. no partic-ular precautions need to be taken.
In the event of work on the electric systemor emergency starting, the instructions giv-en below must absolutely be adhered to:
– Always switch off the engine before dis-connecting the battery from the electric sys-tem.
– If it is necessary to charge the battery,always disconnect it from the electric sys-tem.
– When starting in an emergency, onlyuse an auxiliary battery and not a batterycharger.
– Check that the bias is correct and thatthe connections between the battery andthe electric system are in efficient conditions.
– Before disconnecting or connecting theterminals of electronic units, ensure that theignition key is not in the MAR position.
WHEELS AND TYRES
TYRE PRESSURE
Check the tyre pressure of every wheel, in-cluding the spare.
The pressure should be checked with thetyre rested and cold.
It is normal for the pressure to increasewhen the car is in use. Should it becomenecessary to restore the pressure with thetyre hot, bear in mind that the pressureshould be +0.3 bar compared with the spec-ified rating.
For the correct tyre inflation pressure, seewheels in the “Technical Specifications”chapter.
Alterations or repairs tothe electric system carried
out incorrectly and without takingaccount of the specifications of thesystem, may cause operating faultswith the risk of fire.
WARNING
Remember that vehicleroad holding also depends
on correct tyre inflation pressure.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
237
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear (fig. 11):
A - Normal pressure: tread evenly worn.
B - Low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.
C - High pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.
Tyres should be changed when the treadthickness is reduced to 1.6 mm. In any casefollow local regulations.
fig. 11
A0A0225m
IMPORTANT
Where possible, avoid suddent braking,tyre squealing starts, etc.
Particularly avoid violent bumps againstkerbs, potholes or obstacles of various kinds.Prolonged driving on rough roads may dam-age the tyres. Routinely check the tyres forcuts on the sides, swellings or uneven treadwear. If necessary contact Alfa Romeo Au-thorised Services.
Avoid overloading the vehicle when trav-elling: this may cause serious damage to thewheels and tyres.
If a tyre is punctured, stop immediatelyand change it to avoid damage to the tyreitself, the rim, suspensions and steering sys-tem. Tyres age even if they are not usedmuch. Cracks in the tread rubber are a signof aging. In any case, if the tyres have beenon the vehicle for over 6 years, they shouldbe checked by specialised personnel, to seeif they can still be used.
In the case of replacement, always fit newtyres, avoiding those of dubious origin.
The Alfa 147 GTA uses Tubelesstyres. Never use an inner tube with thesetyres.
If a tyre is changed, also change the infla-tion valve.
To allow even wear between the front andrear tyres it is advisable to change over every10-15 thousand kilometres, keeping themon the same side of the car so as not to re-verse the direction of rotation (fig. 12).
fig. 12
A0A0459m
Excessively low pressurecauses overheating of the
tyre with the possibility of seriousdamage to it.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
238
WINDSCREEN/REARSCREEN WIPERS
BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using spe-cial products; TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 is recommended.
If the rubber blades are bent or worn theyshould be replaced. In any case they shouldbe changed once a year.
A few simple notions can reduce the pos-sibility of damage to the blades:
– If the temperature falls below zero,make sure that ice has not frozen the rub-ber against the glass. If necessary, thaw us-ing an antifreeze product.
– Remove any snow from the glass: in ad-dition to protecting the blades, this preventseffort on the motor and overheating.
– Do not operate the windscreen andrearscreen wipers on dry glass.
RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel sup-ply rubber hoses are concerned, carefully fol-low the Scheduled Maintenance Programmeof this chapter. Indeed, ozone, high tem-peratures and the prolonged lack of fluid inthe system may cause hardening and crack-ing of the hoses, with possible leaks. Care-ful control is therefore necessary.
Do not cross switch thetyres, moving them from
the right of the car to the left andvice versa.
WARNING
Alloy rim painting involvingtemperatures exceeding
150°C should be avoided sincewheel mechanical characteristicscould be impaired.
WARNING
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
239
Changing the windscreen wiperblade (fig. 13)
Instructions for removing thewindscreen wiper blade
Proceed as follows:
– raise the windscreen wiper arm (A);
– turn blade (B) 90° around pin (C), setat the end of the arm;
– remove the blade from pin (C).
Instructions for refitting thewindscreen wiper blade
To refit the blade proceed as follows:
– fit pin (C) into the hole located at themiddle of the blade (B);
– place the arm with the blade on thewindscreen.
Changing the rearscreen blade(fig. 14)
– Raise the cover (A) and remove the armfrom the car, slackening the nut (B) thatfastens it to the pivot pin.
– Correctly position the new arm and firm-ly tighten the nut.
– Lower the cover.
fig. 14
A0A0227m
SPRAY JETS (fig. 15-16)
If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly checkthat there is fluid in the reservoir: see“Checking levels” in this chapter.
Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary use a needle.
If necessary, direct the jet of fluid work-ing on the adjustment screw (A).
fig. 15
A0A0460m
fig. 16
A0A0461m
Driving with worn wiperblades is a serious hazard,
because visibility is reduced in badweather.
WARNING
fig. 13
A0A0728m
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
240
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
Regularly check that the spray jets are in-tact and clean (fig. 17).
If it is necessary to direct the jet, contactan Alfa Romeo Authorised Service.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are:
– atmospheric pollution
– salty air and humidity (coastal areas, orhot humid climates)
– seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also the abra-sive action of wind-borne atmospheric dustand sand and mud and gravel raised by oth-er vehicles.
On your Alfa 147 GTA, Alfa Romeohas implemented the best manufacturingtechnologies to effectively protect the body-work against corrosion.
These include:
– Painting products and systems whichgive the vehicle particular resistance to cor-rosion and abrasion.
– Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steelsheets, with high resistance to corrosion.
– Spraying the underbody, engine com-partment, wheel arches and other parts withhighly protective wax products.
fig. 17
A0A0425m
– Spraying of plastic parts, with a protec-tive function, in the more exposed points:underdoor, inner wheel arch linings, etc.
– Use of “open” boxed sections to pre-vent condensation and pockets of moisturefrom triggering rust inside.
VEHICLE EXTERIOR ANDUNDERBODY WARRANTY
The Alfa 147 GTA is guaranteedagainst perf oration due to rust of any orig-inal element of the structure or body. For thegeneral terms of this warranty, refer to theWarranty Booklet.
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
241
ADVICE FOR PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Paint
The paintwork does not only serve an aes-thetic purpose but also protects the under-lying sheet metal.
In the case of deep scrapes or scores, youare advised to have the necessary touch-ing up carried out immediately to avoid theformation of rust.
Only original products should be used fortouching up paint (see “Body paint identi-fication plate” in the “Technical Specifica-tions” chapter).
Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on the con-ditions and environment of use. For exam-ple, in highly polluted areas, or if the roadsare sprayed with salt, it is wise to wash thecar more frequently.
Do not wash the vehicle after it has beenleft in the sun or with the bonnet hot: thismay alter the shine of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned inthe same way as the rest of the vehicle.
Where possible, do not park under trees;the resinous substance many species releasegive the paint a dull appearance and in-crease the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings must bewashed off immediately and thoroughly asthe acid they contain is particularly aggres-sive.
Windows
Use specific products to clean the windows.Use clean cloths to avoid scratching or al-tering the transparency of the glass.
IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments toavoid damaging the heating device.
Detersives pollute water.The car should therefore bewashed in areas equipped
for the collection and purificationof the liquid used in the washingprocess.
To correctly wash the car:
1) Remove the aerial from the roof to pre-vent damage to it if the car is washed inan automatic system.
2) Spray the vehicle with a low pressurejet of water.
3) Pass a sponge moistened with a lightdetergent solution, rinsing the sponge fre-quently.
4) Rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or chamois leather.
When drying, take particular care with theless visible parts like door surrounds, bon-net and around the headlights where wa-ter may stagnate. The vehicle should not betaken to a closed area immediately, but leftin the open so that residual water can evap-orate.
VEH
ICLE
MAIN
TEN
AN
CE
242
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
– Remove dried on dirt with a lightlymoistened chamois leather or cloth with-out pressing too hard.
– Remove liquid and grease stains witha dry absorbent cloth without rubbing. Thenwipe with a soft cloth or chamois leatherwith water and neutral soap. If the stain per-sists, use specific products, carefully follow-ing the instructions for use.
IMPORTANT Never use alcohol. Makesure that cleaning products do not containalcohol and alcohol derivatives even at lowstrength.
INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
Use appropriate products designed to pre-serve the appearance of components.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro-leum to clean the instrument cluster.
Engine compartment
At the end of the winter the engine com-partment should be carefully washed, with-out directing the jet against electronic con-trol units. Contact a specialised workshop tohave this done.
INTERIOR FITTINGS
Periodically check that water is not trappedunder the mats (due to water dripping offshoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could cause ox-idisation of the sheet metal.
Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the en-gine compartment should
be washed in areas equipped forcollecting and purifying the liquidused in the washing process.
IMPORTANT The vehicle should washedwith the engine cold and the ignition key atSTOP. After washing make sure that thevarious protections (e.g. rubber caps andvarious covers) have not been damaged orremoved.
CLEANING SEATS AND FABRICAND VELVET PARTS
– Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner toremove dust. Velvet is cleaned better if thebrush is moistened.
– Rub the seats with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral deter-gent.
Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oil ether
or rectified petrol for cleaning insidethe car. The electrostatic chargesgenerated when rubbing to cleanmay cause fire.
WARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans inthe car. They might ex-
plode. Aerosol cans must never beexposed to a temperature above50°C. The temperature inside thecar exposed to the sun may go wellbeyond that figure.
WARNING
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
243
IDENTIFICATION LABEL
This (fig. 2) is to be found on the frontcross member of the engine compartment.
It contains the following information:(A) Space for details of national ho-
mologation(B) Space for punching the consecutive
chassis number(C) Space available for maximum
weights authorised by various na-tional regulations
(D) Space for version and any supple-mentary indications to those speci-fied
(E) Space for smoke coefficient (Dieselversions)
(F) Space for punching manufacturer’sname.
BODYWORK LABEL
This is located in the engine bay, to oneside of the upper right shock absorber(fig. 3) and contains:
– Type of vehicle: ZAR 937.000
– Manufacturer’s serial number (chassisnumber).
IDENTIFICATION DATA
You are advised to note the identificationcodes. The identification data stamped andgiven on the labels and their position arethe following (fig. 1):
1 - Identification label
2 - Body label
3 - Bodywork paint identification label
4 - Engine label.
TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS
fig. 1
A0A0462m
fig. 2
A0A0246m
fig. 3
A0A0247m
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
244
BODYWORK PAINTIDENTIFICATION LABEL
The label (fig. 4) is on the inner left edgeof the tailgate. It contains the following in-formation:
A. Paint manufacturer.
B. Name of colour.
C. Colour code.
ENGINE STAMP
The engine marking is stamped on thegearbox side of the crankcase, in corre-spondence with the exhaust manifold.
fig. 4
A0A0248m
ENGINE CODES - BODY VERSIONS
3.2 V6 24V
3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
937AXL1B 16C
937AXL11 17C
Engine code
932A000
932A000
Body versions
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
245
Code type
Cycle
Number and position of cylinders
Piston bore and stroke mm
Total displacement cm3
Maximum horsepower (EEC):kWHP
at rpm
Maximum torque (EEC):Nm
kgmat rpm
Spark plugs
Fuel
ENGINE3.2 V6 24V
932A000
Otto
6 in 60° V
93 x 78
3179
1842506200
30030.64800
NGK R PFR6B
Unleaded petrol 95 RON(Specification EN228)
3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
932A000
Otto
6 in 60° V
93 x 78
3179
1842506200
30030.64800
NGK R PFR6B
Unleaded petrol 95 RON(Specification EN228)
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
246
Supply
Firing order
FUEL SUPPLY
TRANSMISSION
3.2 V6 24V
Electronic injection Multi Point
1-4-2-5-3-6
Gearbox
Clutch
Drive
3.2 V6 24V
Six forward gears plus reverse all synchronised
Dry single disk with hydraulic control
Front
3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
Electronic injection Multi Point
1-4-2-5-3-6
3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
Six forward gears plus reverse with electronic control
Dry single disk with electrohydraulic control
Front
Alterations or repairs to the supply system not carried out correctly or without taking account of thetechnical specifications of the system, may cause abnormal functioning with the risk of fire.
WARNING
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
247
SPARK PLUGS
Clean, intact spark plugs are determinantwith regard to engine efficiency and for re-ducing the emission of pollutants.
Spark plugs should be re-placed at the intervalsspecified in the Scheduled
maintenance programme. Only usespark plugs of the specified type:if the thermal capacity is inade-quate or if the envisaged life is notguaranteed inconveniences may en-sue.
BRAKES
Service brakes: – front
– rear
Parking brake
If examined by an expert eye, the ap-pearance of a spark plug is a sound cluefor locating a fault, even if not involving theignition system. Therefore if you are expe-riencing any engine problems, it is impor-tant to have the spark plugs checked by Al-fa Romeo Authorized Services.
STEERING
Type
Turning radius (between pavements)
3.2 V6 24V - 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
Disk self-ventilated
Disk
3.2 V6 24V 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
Rack and pinion.Hydraulic power steering with fluid reservoir in engine compartment
12.1 m 12.1 m
Wheel anti-look system (ABS) with electronic braking distribution.Servo-brake. Electronic control with brake pad wear sensors. Gaskets of ecological type.
Controlled by hand lever operating rear brakes.
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
248
WHEELS
Standard fittings
Rims
Tyres
Optional items
Rims
Tyres
Winter tyres
(*) IMPORTANT Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".
(▼) Size certified and admitted only for YOKOHAMA.
3.2 V6 24V - 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
7,5J x 17“
225/45 ZR17“ 91Y (unchainable tyres)
8J x 18”
235/35 R18” 90Y (▼) (unchainable tyres)215/45 R17” 87W (*) 215/45 ZR17” 87W (*)
225/45 ZR17“ 91Q (M+S) (unchainable tyres)
TYRES INFLATION PRESSURES COLD
With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.
Tyres215/45 ZR17“ 87W
front rear
2.5 2.3
2.8 2.6
Tyres215/45 R17“ 87W
front rear
2.5 2.3
2.8 2.6
Tyres235/35 R18“ 90Y
front rear
2.5 2.3
2.8 2.6
Tyres225/45 ZR17“ 91Y
front rear
2.5 2.3
2.8 2.6
Reduced loadbar(2 occupants)
Full load bar
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
249
RIMS AND TYRES
Alloy rims.
Radial Tubeless tyres.
The Log book shows all the homologatedtyres.
IMPORTANT In the event of any dis-crepancies between this Handbook and thevehicle Log Book, only the latter should beconsidered.
While the specified dimensions remain thesame, for driving safety, the vehicle must befitted with tyres of the same brand and typeon all wheels.
IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubeswith Tubeless tyres.
CORRECT TYRE READING (fig. 5)
Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped onthe tyre.
The code may be like one of the examplesgiven below.
Load index (capacity)
60 = 250 kg61 = 257 kg62 = 265 kg63 = 272 kg64 = 280 kg65 = 290 kg66 = 300 kg67 = 307 kg68 = 315 kg69 = 325 kg70 = 335 kg71 = 345 kg72 = 355 kg73 = 365 kg74 = 375 kg75 = 387 kg76 = 400 kg77 = 412 kg78 = 425 kg79 = 437 kg80 = 450 kg81 = 462 kg82 = 475 kg83 = 487 kg
84 = 500 kg85 = 515 kg86 = 530 kg87 = 545 kg88 = 560 kg89 = 580 kg90 = 600 kg91 = 615 kg92 = 630 kg93 = 650 kg94 = 670 kg95 = 690 kg96 = 710 kg97 = 730 kg98 = 750 kg99 = 775 kg100 = 800 kg101 = 825 kg102 = 850 kg103 = 875 kg104 = 900 kg105 = 925 kg106 = 950 kg
Example:
225/45 ZR17 91Y
225 = Nominal width (S, distancein mm between sides).
45 = Percentage height/width ratio(H/S).
ZR = Radial tyre with speed above240 kph.
17 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).
91 = Load index (capacity).
Y = Maximum speed index.
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
250
Example:
7.5 J x 17 H2 ET 43
Maximum speed index
Q = up to 160 km/h
R = up to 170 km/h
S = up to 180 km/h
T = up to 190 km/h
U = up to 200 km/h
H = up to 210 km/h
V = up to 240 km/h
W = up to 270 km/h
Y = up to 300 km/h
Maximum speed index for snow tyres
Q M + S = up to 160 km/h
T M + S = up to 190 km/h
H M + S = up to 210 km/h
CORRECT RIM READING
Below are the instructions necessary toknow the meaning of the code stamped onthe rim, as shown in fig. 5.
fig. 5
A0M0465m
7.5 = rim width in inches (1)
J = rim drop centre outline (side pro-jection where the tyre bead rests(2)
17 = rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø)
H2 = “hump“ shape and number (reliefon the circumference holding theTubeless tyre bead on the rim)
ET 43 = camber angle (distance be-tween disk/rim line and wheelrim centre line)
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
251
PERFORMANCE
Maximum speed
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h
Kilometer with standing start
3.2 V6 24V
246 km/h
6.3 s
26.1 s
WHEEL GEOMETRY
3.2 V6 24V - 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
– 0° 24´ ± 20´
4° 6´ ± 30´
–2 ± 0.6 mm (*) (–18 ± 5)
– 1° 12´ ± 20´
+2.5 ± 1 mm (*) (23´ ± 9)
3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
246 km/h
6.3 s
26.1 s
– camber
Front wheels: – caster
– toe-in
Rear wheels:– camber
– toe-in
(*) The toe-in value, primes to mm conversion, is always calculated taking into account a 15" rim regardless of rims actually used. Should it be impossibleto set the 15" rim at the test bench, refer to primes value. The toe-in value, tolerance included, shall always be evenly distributed between the two wheels.
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
252
DIMENSIONS
fig. 6
A0M0463m
A B C D E F G H I
4213 925 2546 742 1412 1516 1890 1764 1504
Dimensions are expressed in mm - Height indicated is for an unladen car
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
253
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT - SALOON VERSIONS
WEIGHTS
Capacity dm3
Capacity with rear seat back rest folded dm3
3.2 V6 24V
280
1030
Kerb weight kg
Max. permitted weight (*) kg
Payload including driver (**) kg
(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.
(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weight allowed.
3.2 V6 24V
1360
1880
520
3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
280
1030
3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
1360
1880
520
3.2 V6 24V
637
9.2
5.90
2
–
2.55.3
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
254
REFILLINGSpecified fuels
Recommended products
Unleaded petrol with no less than 95 R.O.N(Specification EN228)
Mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU 11(blue) at 50% or PARAFLU UP (red) at 50%
SELENIA RACING
TUTELA CAR MATRYX
TUTELA CAR CS SPEED
Mixture of water and liquidTUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35
3.2 V6 24VSelespeed
637
9.2
5.90
2
0.6
2.55.3
Fuel tank: litres– including a reserve of litres
Engine cooling system litres
Oil sump and filter litres
Mechanical gearbox/differential litres
Selespeed hydraulic control system litres
Windscreen washer and rearscreenwasher fluid reservoir: litres
– with headlamp washer litres
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
255
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
USABLE PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
IMPORTANT Do not top up with oil with different specifications that the oil already in the engine.
Use Quality features of fluids and lubricants Recommended fluids Applicationsfor correct vehicle operation and lubricants
Lubricants forpetrol engines
SAE 10W-60 engine oil synthetic lubricant SELENIA RACING
A0M
0464
m
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
256
Use
Brake fluid
Protective agent for radiators
Windscreen/rearscreen/headlampwasher fluid
(*) IMPORTANT Do not add or mix with fluids with specifications other than the specified ones.
Recommended fluidsand lubricants
TUTELA CARMATRYX
TUTELA CAR CS SPEED
TUTELA GI/A
TUTELA MRM 2
TUTELA CAR TOP 4 for Alfa Romeo
PARAFLU 11 (*)
or
PARAFLU UP (*)
TUTELAPROFESSIONALSC 35
Applications
Mechanical gearbox anddifferential
Selespeed transmissionelectrically-operatedelectrohydraulic drive
Hydraulic power steering
C.V. joints
Hydraulic brake and clutch control
Cooling ductsPercentage:50% down to –35°C
To be used neat or diluted
Lubricants and greasesfor transmissions
Quality features of fluids and lubricantsfor correct vehicle operation
SAE 75W-85 synthetic oil. Meets API GL 4 and MIL-L-2105 D LEV specifications
ATF DEXRON III type oil
“ATF DEXRON II D LEV“, type oil
Lithium-soap-based grease with molybdenum bisulphate.Consistency NLGI 2
F.M.V.S.S. n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J1704 CUNA NC 956-01 synthetic fluid
Protective with antifreeze action, blue color, based on inhibited monoethyleneglycol, CUNA NC 956-16
Protective with antifreeze action, red colour, based on inhibited monoethylenglycol, with O.A.T.-based organic formula, that passes CUNA NC 956-16,ASTM D 3306 specifications
Mixture of spirits and surface-active agents CUNA NC 956-11
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
257
Urban
Extraurban
Combined
3.2 V6 24V
18.1
8.6
12.1
CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO EEC 1999/100/ (litres x 100 km)
FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption values shown in thefollowing tables were established during ho-mologation tests prescribed in specific Eu-ropean Directives.
The test conditions adopted include the fol-lowing:
– an urban cycle: this includes coldstarting followed by simulation of a mixedurban route;
– an extraurban cycle: this includesfrequent accelerating in all gears, simulat-ing normal extraurban use of the vehicle;the speed varies between 0 and 120 kph;
– combined consumption: this is cal-culated by considering a route consisting ofabout 37% urban cycle and 63% extraur-ban cycle.
WARNING The type of route, traf-fic conditions, weather conditions,driving style, conditions of the ve-hicle, trim level/equipment/ acces-sories, vehicle load, presence of roofrack, use of the climate control sys-tem, other items that negatively af-fect the aerodynamics of the vehi-cle or wind resistance lead to dif-ferent fuel consumption levels thanthose measured by the above-men-tioned procedures (see “Reducingrunning costs and environment pol-lution“ in the chapter “Correct useof the car“).
3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
18.1
8.6
12.1
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFIC
ATI
ON
S
258
CO2EMISSIONS
Value (g/km)
3.2 V6 24V
287
The CO2emission levels shown in the following tables are measured on a mixed cycle.
CO2EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (g/km)
3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
287
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
259
RRIIGGHHTT HHAANNDD DDRRIIVVEE VVEERRSSIIOONNThis chapter describes the main characteristics of the right hand drive version.
For any topic not specifically dealt with in this chapter, refer to the main chapters of this manual which should be thoroughly read to ensurethat the vehicle is used correctly and that the maximum performance is obtained under conditions of safety.
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
260
DASHBOARD
1. Side swivel air vents - 2. Fixed side window air vents - 3. Passenger’s front Air bag - 4. Tailgate release button - 5. Card holder - 6. Radio -7. Centre swivel air vents - 8. Fixed upper vent - 9. Glass holder - 10. Fog lamp button - 11. Hazard warning light switch - 12. Rear fog guardbutton - 13. Outer light control lever - 14. Speedometer with mileage recorder and trip recorder and headlamp aiming display - 15. Fuel levelgauge with reserve warning light - 16. Multifunction display - 17. Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge - 18. Rev counter - 19. Wind-screen/rearscreen wiper control lever - 20. Bonnet opening lever - 21. Set of controls: trip meter reset, headlamp aiming device, trip comput-er - 22. Ignition key and switch - 23. Horn - 24. Steering wheel locking/release lever - 25. Driver’s front Air bag - 26. Door locking button -27. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 28. Ashtray - 29. Cigar lighter - 30. Temperature sensor - 31 Glovebox.
fig. 1A0A0475m
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
261
A. Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight - B. Engine coolant fluid temperaturegauge with maximum temperature warninglight - C. Speedometer - D. Odometer dis-play (mileage recorder, trip meter with head-lamp position display) - E. Reconfigurablemultifunction display - F. Rev counter
fig. 2 A0A0476m
INSTRUMENT PANEL
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
262
RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY
CONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 3-4)
To make use of the information that the digital display (with the ignition key at MAR) is capable of providing, it is firstly necessary to familia-rise with the corresponding control buttons, to be found on the panel at the side of the steering column and on the top of the right lever. You arealso advised to read through the corresponding description in the chapter “Getting to know your car” before doing anything at all.
Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated withT in the following dia-grams to move to the next screen
Press for more than 4 seconds indicated withU in the following diagrams, toreset and then start a new journey
To scroll the display and the related options, upwards or to increase the valuedisplayed depending on the case
To scroll the display and the related options, downwards or decrease the valuedisplayed according to the case
Press for less than 1 second (pulse) indicated withQ in the following dia-grams to confirm the choice required and move to the next screen
Press for more than 2 seconds indicated with R in the following diagramsto confirm the choice required and return to the standard screen
fig. 3
A0A0305m
fig. 4
A0A0021m
IMPORTANT Buttonsâ andãactivate different functions depending on the followingsituations:
- When the standard screen is activated, they allow adjustment of the inner lighting - Within the menu they allow scrolling up or down- They make it possible to increase or decrease during setting operations.
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
263
MILEAGE RECORDER
Odometer display with double counter forshowing the total and trip meter in milesand showing the headlamp aiming.
The display shows:
– the miles travelled on the first line (6digits)
– the trip meter in miles on the secondline (4 digits)
– at the side the position of the headlampaiming device.
fig. 5
A0A0304m
To reset the trip meter in miles, keep but-ton (A-fig. 5) on the panel at the side ofthe steering column pressed for a few mo-ments.
IMPORTANT If the battery is discon-nected the distance of the trip meter is notstored.
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS
The driver can adjust the steering wheelposition in rake and height.
To do this, release the lever (A-fig. 6)pulling it towards the steering wheel.
After moving the steering wheel to themost suitable position, lock it pushing thelever fully forwards.
fig. 6
A0A0307m
Any adjustment of thesteering wheel position
must be carried out only with thevehicle stationary.
WARNING
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
264
Driver’s side (fig. 8)
The driver’s door panel contains the but-tons that control the following windows,with the ignition key at MAR:A - left windowB - right window.Press the button to lower the window. Pull
to raise it.
IMPORTANT The driver’s power windowis fitted with the “continuous automatic op-eration” device for both lowering and raisingthe window. A brief press on the upper orlower part of the button will cause it to moveand continue automatically: the windowstops in the required position by pressing ei-ther the upper or lower part of the buttonagain.
fig. 8
A0A0309m
WING MIRRORADJUSTMENT
Electric adjustment (fig. 7)
– use the switch (A) to select the mirrorrequired (right or left);
– pressing the button (B), in one of thefour directions, move the mirror selected pre-viously;
– Position the switch (A) in the interme-diate locking position.
IMPORTANT Adjustment is possible on-ly with the ignition key at MAR.
fig. 7
A0A0308m
POWER WINDOWS For some versions, the power windows are
fitted with a safety system with crush-pre-vention seals. The electronic control unit thatoperates the system is capable of detect-ing the presence of an obstacle during thewindow closing motion through the specialseals. Should this occur, the system stopsthe movement of the window and reversesit immediately.
IMPORTANT If the crush-preventionfunction is operated for 3 times in 1 minute,the system automatically sets to the recov-ery mode (self-protection). To reset the cor-rect system operating logic, use the controlbutton. The window will rise in predefinedsteps until closing completely. The logic is re-set and if there are no faults, the windowwinder automatically resumes normal oper-ation; if not, contact Alfa Romeo AuthorisedServices.
With the ignition key at STOP or removed,the power windows remain activated forabout 3 minutes and are deactivated im-mediately the moment a door is opened.
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
265
Do not keep the buttonpressed when the windowis completely raised or
lowered.
fig. 9
A0A0310m
IMPORTANT If the car is fitted withsafety seals, after locking the doors, keep-ing the corresponding button on the remotecontrol pressed for about 2 seconds the win-dows and sunroof (if present) are closed au-tomatically. The remote control button mustbe kept pressed until the windows havecompleted their stroke, releasing the buttonbefore, the windows stop in the positionthey are in at that moment.
On all versions, after unlocking the doors,keeping the remote control button pressedfor about 2 seconds the windows and sun-roof (if present) are opened.
Passenger’s side (fig. 9)
The button (A) controls the passenger’sside window.
IMPORTANT The passenger’s powerwindow is fitted with the “automatic con-tinuous operation” device for lowering thewindow only. The device works in the sameway as the one on the driver’s side.
Improper use of powerwindows can be danger-
ous. Before and during use, alwaysmake sure that the passengers arenot exposed to the risk of harm ei-ther directly by the moving win-dows or by personal objects drawnor knocked by them. When leavingthe car, always remove the igni-tion key to prevent the powerwindows from being operated in-advertently, and harming anyoneleft on board.
WARNING
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
266
FRONT SEATS
fig. 10
A0A0477m
LENGTHWISEADJUSTMENT (fig. 10)
Raise the lever (A) and push the seatbackwards or forwards; in the driving posi-tion the arms should be slightly flexed andthe hands should rest on the rim of the steer-ing wheel.
DRIVER’S SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT (fig. 10)
To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) up-wards, then work the lever (up and down)until reaching the required height, then re-lease it. To lower the seat, push the lever(B) downwards then work the lever (up anddown) until reaching the required height.
IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-ried out only seated in the driver’s seat.
BACK REST ANGLEADJUSTMENT (fig. 10)
Turn the knob (C) until reaching the posi-tion required.
TILTING THE BACK REST (fig. 10)(3-door versions)
To gain access to the rear seats, pull thehandle (E), the back rest folds and the seatis free to run forwards.
A recovery mechanism with memorymakes it possible to take the seat back toits previous position.
Once the seat back has been returned tothe travelling condition, make sure that itis correctly clamped, checking that the “redband” on the upper part of the handle (E)is concealed. In fact, this “red band” indi-cates that the seat back is not camped.
Also check that the seat is firmly locked onthe runners, trying to move it to and fro.
DRIVER’S SEAT LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT (fig. 10)
Turn the knob (D) until obtaining the mostcomfortable position.
Any adjustments are to becarried out only with the
vehicle stationary.
WARNING
After releasing the adjust-ment lever, always check
that the seat is locked on the run-ners, trying to move it to and fro.The lack of this clamping actioncould cause the seat to move un-expectedly and cause loss of ve-hicle control.
WARNING
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
267
FRONT AND SIDEAIR BAGS
The car is fitted with front Air bags for thedriver (fig. 11), for the passenger (fig. 12)and side bag (fig. 13) and window bag(fig. 14).
fig. 11
A0A0311m
fig. 12
A0A0312m
DEACTIVATING THEPASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG MANUALLY
Should it be absolutely necessary to car-ry a child on the front seat, the passenger’sAir bag on the vehicle can be deactivated.
Deactivation takes place using the car ig-nition key to operate the special switch onthe left hand side of the dashboard
fig. 13
A0A0478m
fig. 14
A0A0479m
(fig. 15). Access to the switch is only pos-sible with the door open.
The key-operated switch (fig. 15) hastwo positions:
1) Passenger’s front Air bag activated:(ON position P) warning light on instru-ment cluster off; it is absolutely prohibitedto carry a child on the front seat.
2) Passenger’s front Air bag deactivated:(OFF position F) warning light on in-strument cluster on; it is possible to carry achild protected by special restraint systemson the front seat.
The warning light F on the cluster stayson permanently until the passenger’s Air bagis reactivated.
Deactivation of the passenger’s front Air bagdoes not inhibit operation of the side Air bag.
When the door is open, the key can be in-serted and removed in both positions.
fig. 15
A0A0313m
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
268
1 Upper stationary vent for defrosting or demisting windscreen - 2 Upper centre adjustable vent - 3 Stationary vents for defrosting or demist-ing side windows - 4 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 5 Side adjustable and swivel outlets - 6 Front feet area fixed vents - 7 Rear feet areafixed vents - 8 Rear adjustable swivel outlet.
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
fig. 16
A0A0480m
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
269
UPPER CENTRE VENTADJUSTMENT (fig. 17)
The vent (1) has an opening/closing con-trol (A).
• = Completely closed.
I = Completely open.
CENTRE SWIVEL VENTSADJUSTMENT (fig. 17)
Each vent (2) has a lever (B) whichmakes it possible to direct the flow of air (inthe 4 directions: up/down, right/left).
To adjust the air flow, use control (C):
• = Completely closed.
I = Completely open.
SIDE SWIVEL OUTLETSADJUSTMENT (fig. 18)
To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) asrequired.
To adjust the air flow, use control (C):
• = Completely closed.
I = Partially open.
II = Completely open.
D - fixed vent for defrosting or demistingside windows.
REAR SWIVEL OUTLETADJUSTMENT (fig. 19)
To direct the flow of air, turn the knurledring (A) and/or directly use control (B) asrequired.
To adjust the air flow, use control (C):
• = Completely closed.
I = Partially open.
II = Completely open.
fig. 17
A0A0085m
fig. 18
A0A0315m
fig. 19
A0A0087m
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
270
If no leaks are found the vehicle can berestarted. Press button (A) to activate thefuel supply system again.
fig. 22
A0A0318m
CONTROLSINERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFFSWITCH (fig. 22)
This is an automatic safety switch, to befound on the floor next to the driver’s doorpillar, which is triggered in the event of acrash of a certain magnitude to interrupt theflow of fuel.
The cutting in of the inertial switch is shownon the display of the instrument cluster.
INTERIOR FITTINGSGLOVEBOX
On the dashboard there is a glovebox withlid and light.
To open use handle (A-fig. 20).
When the glovebox is opened with the ig-nition key at MAR a courtesy light insideis turned on (A-fig. 21).
The fitting is completed by a recess (B) onthe lid for inserting a pen or pencil.
fig. 20
A0A0316m
fig. 21
A0A0317m
If a smell of fuel is notedfollowing an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoidthe risk of fire do not reset theswitch.
WARNING
Do not travel with theglovebox open: the lid could
harm the passenger in the event ofan accident.
WARNING
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
271
BONNET
The bonnet opening lever is under the leftend of the dashboard.
To open:
– pull the lever (A-fig. 23) until the bon-net clicks open.
– press the safety lever (A-fig. 24) up-wards.
– raise the bonnet.
IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided bytwo gas springs. Do not tamper with thesesprings and accompany the bonnet whileraising it.
fig. 23
A0A0481m
fig. 24
A0A0437m
To close:
– lower the bonnet until approx. 20 cmfrom the engine compartment and then letit drop, ensuring that it is fully closed andnot just held in position by the safety catch.
If the bonnet does not close properly donot push it down but open it again and re-peat the above procedure.
Scarves, ties and otherloose clothing might be
pulled by moving parts.
WARNINGDo this only with the carstationary.
WARNING
For safety reasons thebonnet shall always be
perfectly closed when travelling.Always check for proper bonnetlocking. If the bonnet is left inad-vertently open, stop the car im-mediately and close the bonnet.
WARNING
DANGER-SERIOUS INJURY.When carrying out checks
or maintenance operations in theengine compartment, take specialcare not to bump the head on theraised bonnet.
WARNING
If checks are needed in theengine compartment, when
it is still hot, do not approach thefan: it might start working alsowith the ignition key removed.Wait for the engine to cool down.
WARNING
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
272
HEADLIGHTSCOMPENSATION FOR TILT(fig. 25)
When the vehicle is loaded, the beam fromthe headlights is raised due to the backwardstilt of the vehicle.
In this case the headlights must be ad-justed correctly.
To do this, use the rocker button (A), onthe plate at the side of the steering column:
– pressing the button in correspondencewith the arrow (A) increases by one posi-tion (e.g.: 0 ➟ 1 ➟ 2 ➟ 3);
– pressing the button in correspondencewith the arrow (S) decreases by one posi-tion (e.g.: 3 ➟ 2 ➟ 1 ➟ 0);
The display (B) in the speedometer showsthe position while adjustment takes place.
fig. 25
A0A0320m
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTABROAD (fig. 26)
The dipped-beam headlights are adjustedfor circulation in the country in which the ve-hicle is marketed. In countries with oppositecirculation, to avoid glaring oncoming vehi-cles it is necessary to cover the areas of theheadlight as shown below; this is done us-ing non-transparent sticker tape.
The illustration refers to the passage fromleft-hand drive to right-hand drive.
fig. 26
A0A0321m
For correct adjustment, bear in mind thefollowing conditions:
– position 0: one or two people occupy-ing the front seats
– position 1: five people;
– position 2: five people + load in theboot;
– position 3: driver + maaximum per-missible load all stowed inthe boot
Check headlight aimingevery time the load carried
changes.
WARNING
RIG
HT
HAN
D D
RIV
E VER
SIO
N
273
IN THE EVENT OF A BLOWN FUSE
Never replace a fuse withmetal wires or anythingelse. Always use an intact
fuse of the same colour.Access is gained to the control box on the
dashboard by slackening the two retainers(A-fig. 27) and removing the protectivetrim (B).
fig. 27
A0A0482m
Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp
rating, DANGER OF FIRE.
WARNING
If a general fuse (MAXI-FUSE or MEGA-FUSE) cuts
in, do not attempt any repair andcontact an Alfa Romeo AuthorisedService.
WARNING
If a fuse blows again, con-tact an Alfa Romeo Autho-
rised Service.
WARNING
Before replacing a fuse,make sure the ignition key
has been removed and that all theother services are switched offand/or disengaged.
WARNING
ALP
HABET
ICAL
INDEX
274
AALLPPHHAABBEETTIICCAALL IINNDDEEXX
ABS (Antilock braking system)..... 134
Accessories purchased by the user... 125
Additional operations (maintenance).......................... 224
Additional stop light (third stop) ..... 205
Air bags, front and side............ 35
- deactivating passenger’s side air bags ...................... 37
- front air bags ..................... 36
- general cautions ...................... 40
- passenger’s front air bag........... 37
- right hand drive version ............ 259
- side air bags (side bag - window bag)........... 38
Air cleaner................................... 232
Air re-circulation ........................... 102
Air vents ..................................... 90
Alfa Romeo CODE system.............. 6
- operation................................ 9
Annual inspection programme
(maintenance).......................... 224
Armrest (front) ........................... 18
Armrest (rear) ............................ 21
Ashtray
- front ...................................... 122
- rear ....................................... 123
ASR (system).............................. 138
Battery ..................................... 233
- advice for preserving
the charge .............................. 235
- charging.......................... 216-234
- checking the charge ................. 234
- replacement............................ 235
- starting with an auxiliary
battery................................... 216
Body (cleaning)........................... 240
Body marking.............................. 243
Body versions .............................. 244
Bonnet................................ 130
Boot
- capacity ................................. 253
- extension ........................... 19-20
- lighting .................................. 129
- luggage net ............................ 21
- opening from inside ................. 128
- opening with remote
control ............................... 8-128
- restraining the load .................. 129
- tailgate closing ........................ 129
- warnings for carrying luggage.... 129
Boot light
- changing bulbs ........................ 208
Bose HI-FI system ........................ 172
ALP
HABET
ICAL
INDEX
275
Brake and clutch hydraulic fluid
- checking level and topping up.... 230
Brakes
- checking fluid level and
topping up.............................. 230
- handbrake .............................. 108
- specifications .......................... 247
Braking lights
- changing bulbs ........................ 205
Bulbs
- general instructions .................. 196
- replacement............................ 198
- types of bulbs ......................... 196
Card holder................................ 123
Catalyst ...................................... 174
Cell phones (provision) ................. 125
Changing battery of key with
remote control .......................... 10
Changing bulbs
- general information.................. 196
- types of bulbs ......................... 196
Checking levels ............................ 226
- checking level and topping
up brake and clutch fluid........... 230
- checking level and topping
up coolant fluid ....................... 229
- checking level and topping
up engine oil........................... 227
- checking level and topping
up power steering oil................ 229
- checking level and topping up
windscreen/rearscreen/
headlamp washer fluid ............. 231
Children (carrying safely) .............. 31
Cigar lighter ................................ 122
Cleaning and maintenance
- body...................................... 240
- car interior .............................. 242
- engine compartment ................ 242
- leather seats ........................... 242
- plastic parts ............................ 242
- windows ................................ 241
Climate control, automatic
two-zone.................................. 91
Climate control system.............. 89
- air vents ........................ 89-90
- controls .................................. 93
Clock.......................................... 60
Clutch
- checking fluid level and
topping up.............................. 230
CO2 emissions ............................. 258
CODE card................................... 7
Controls ...................................... 106
Correct use of the car ............ 175
Courtesy light .............................. 121
- changing bulbs ........................ 207
Cruise control .............................. 47
ALP
HABET
ICAL
INDEX
276
Dashboard
Left hand drive ............................ 50
Demisting-defrosting
- door mirrors ............................ 105
- rearscreen .............................. 105
- windscreen and front side
windows ................................ 104
Direction indicators
- changing front bulbs................. 202
- changing rear bulbs.................. 204
- changing side bulbs.................. 203
- switching on ........................... 43
Display, reconfigurable
multifunction ....................... 53
- access to menu screen.............. 57
- control buttons ........................ 54
- dimmer .................................. 75
- display in concurrence
with event .............................. 76
Door light.................................... 122
- changing bulbs ........................ 206
Door locking system ..................... 107
Door mirrors ................................ 23
Doors
- central locking......................... 16
- opening/closing from inside...... 16
- opening/closing from outside.... 15
- remote control......................... 7
- remote locking unlocking .......... 7
Driving
- at night .................................. 179
- before driving off ..................... 178
- economically and respecting
the environment ...................... 183
- in bad weather (rain, fog) ........ 180
- in the mountains ..................... 180
- in winter ................................ 181
- when travelling ....................... 178
- with ABS ................................ 181
Electronic alarm system ............... 11
- description.............................. 11
- ministerial homologation........... 14
- request for additional keys
with remote control.................. 11
- shutting off the system............. 14
- switching off ........................... 12
- switching on ........................... 11
- volumetric protection................ 13
- when the alarm is triggered....... 13
Electronic control units .................. 236
Emergency starting....................... 188
- starting by inertia .................... 190
- starting with an auxiliary
battery................................... 189
Emission reducing devices.............. 174
Engine
- identification codes .................. 244
ALP
HABET
ICAL
INDEX
277
- marking ................................. 244
- specifications .......................... 245
Engine codes ............................... 244
Engine compartment
- bonnet ................................... 130
- washing ................................. 242
Engine coolant fluid
- checking level and topping up........................ 231
- temperature gauge and warning light........................... 52
Engine oil
- checking the level and topping up.............................. 227
- consumption ........................... 227
Engine starting ............................ 175
- emergency starting .................. 177
- ignition switch......................... 14
- switching off ........................... 176
- warming the engine ................. 176
Engine oil consumption ................. 227
EOBD (system)............................ 139
Environment (safeguarding) .......... 174
- emission reducing devices ......... 174
- reducing running costs
and environment pollution......... 181
- running economy..................... 183
- safeguarding emission
reduction devices ..................... 184
- use of non-toxic materials ......... 174
Extending the luggage compartment
- partial .................................... 20
- total ...................................... 19
External lights (switching on) ........ 42
First-aid kit................................. 220
Flashing high beams..................... 43
Fluids (specifications) ................... 255
Fluids and lubricants.............. 255-256
Follow me home device ................ 44
Foglights
- changing bulbs................. 199-201
- switching on ........................... 106
Front ceiling light ......................... 120
- changing bulbs ........................ 206
Fuel
- automatic shut off switch .......... 107
- consumption ........................... 257
- fuel cap.................................. 173
- level gauge and reserve
warning light........................... 52
- refilling .................................. 173
Fuel flap ..................................... 173
Fuel reserve ................................ 52
Fuel supply (technical data)........... 246
Fuses
- in control box in engine
compartment .......................... 210
- in control box on battery post .... 211
ALP
HABET
ICAL
INDEX
278
- in control box on
dashboard ......................... 210
- generalities............................. 209
- list of protected devices ............ 212
Gearshift lever ........................... 109
Getting to know your car .... 6
Glass stand ................................. 123
Glove compartment ...................... 119
Glove compartment light
- changing bulbs ........................ 208
Grab handles ............................... 119
Handbrake
- lever ...................................... 108
Hazard lights
- switching on ........................... 106
Headlamp beam adjustment .......... 132
Headlight washers .................. 46-240
Headlights ............................. 132
- adjustment abroad.............. 132
- changing bulbs................... 198
- compensation for tilt ................ 133
Headrests
- rear ....................................... 21
Heated rearscreen ........................ 105
HI-FI system (Bose) ..................... 172
Hoses......................................... 238
Ignition device ............................ 14
Ignition switch and steering
lock ................................... 14-15
In an emergency..................... 188
In the event of an accident ............ 219
- first aid kit .............................. 220
- if anybody is injured................. 220
Inertial fuel cut off switch......... 107
Instrument panel .................... 50
Intelligent washing ....................... 45
Interior (cleaning) ........................ 242
Interior fittings........................ 119
Interior lighting
- boot lighting ........................... 129
- front lighting ........................... 120
- rear lighting ............................ 121
Key/remote control.................... 6-7
- changing remote control battery 10
- request for additional keys
with remote control.................. 11
Levers at steering wheel .............. 42
Load limiters (seat belts) .............. 27
Low beam headlights
- changing bulbs................. 199-201
- switching on ........................... 42
Lubricants (specifications) ............. 255
Luggage rack connections.............. 131
Luggage restrainer net .................. 21
Main beam headlights
- changing bulbs................. 200-202
- switching on ........................... 42
ALP
HABET
ICAL
INDEX
279
Maintenance
- additional operations................ 224
- annual inspection programme.... 224
- checking levels ........................ 226
- precautions and warnings.......... 225
- scheduled maintenance ............ 221
- scheduled maintenance
programme............................. 222
Mechanical gearbox
- lever ...................................... 109
Number plate lights
- changing bulbs ........................ 205
Paintwork (maintenance) ............ 241
- colour label............................. 244
Parking....................................... 177
Performance................................ 251
Pockets on doors.......................... 124
Pollen filter ................................ 232
Power steering oil
- checking level and topping up.... 229
Power windows ........................... 24
Pretensioners............................... 28
Radio transmitters
and cell phones......................... 126
Radio
- presetting system ................... 140
Radio with CD player .................... 141
- advice.................................... 141
- aerial ..................................... 171
- antitheft protection .................. 144
- cautions ................................. 144
- CD changer ............................. 168
- CD player section..................... 165
- controls at steering wheel ......... 149
- controls on front panel.............. 148
- functions and adjustments......... 150
- general .................................. 143
- glossary ................................. 145
- protection fuse ........................ 171
- radio section ........................... 153
- speakers ................................ 171
- telephone provision.................. 153
Rain sensor ................................. 45
Raising the car
- with arm lift or workshop
lift ......................................... 220
Rear ceiling light .......................... 121
- changing bulbs ........................ 207
Rear fog guards
- changing bulbs ........................ 203
- switching on ........................... 107
Rear oddment pockets .................. 124
Rearscreen heating....................... 105
Rearscreen washer ....................... 46
- spray jet................................. 239
Rearscreen wiper
- blade replacement ................... 239
ALP
HABET
ICAL
INDEX
280
- operation................................ 46
Rearview mirrors
- external ................................. 23
- internal .................................. 22
Reducing running costs
and environment pollution .......... 181
Refuelling
- specifications .......................... 254
Remote control ............................ 7
- additional remote controls ......... 11
- alarm system .......................... 11
- battery changing ..................... 10
- door opening-closing ................ 7
- ministerial homologation........... 14
- tailgate opening ...................... 8
Restraining the load...................... 129
Rev counter................................. 51
Reversing light............................. 203
Right hand drive .................... 259
Roof rack (provision).................... 131
Running economy ........................ 183
Safe driving ............................... 178
Safeguarding emission reduction devices .................................... 184
Safeguarding the environment ....... 174
Scheduled maintenance programme .............................. 222
Seat belts ................................... 25
- carrying children safety............. 31
- front belt height adjustment ...... 27
- general instructions .................. 29
- load limiters............................ 27
- maintenance ........................... 30
- pretensioners .......................... 28
- use of belts............................. 25
Seats for children ......................... 31
Seats, front............................ 16
- adjustments....................... 17
- centre armrest......................... 18
- heating .................................. 18
- rear pockets............................ 18
- tilting the back rest .................. 17
Seats, rear .................................. 19
- boot extension ........................ 19
- centre armrest......................... 21
- headrest................................. 21
Sidelights
- changing front bulbs................. 202
- changing rear bulbs.................. 204
- changing side bulbs.................. 203
- switching on ........................... 43
Snow chains................................ 186
Spark plugs (technical data) .......... 247
Speakers ................................... 171
Speedometer............................... 51
Spray jets
- windscreen/rearscreen ............. 239
ALP
HABET
ICAL
INDEX
281
Starting with an auxiliary
battery..................................... 189
Steering lock ............................... 15
Steering system
- adjustment lever...................... 22
- technical specifications.............. 247
Steering wheel
- adjustment lever ................ 22
Sunroof ...................................... 127
- emergency manoeuvre ............. 128
- opening-closing........................ 127
- raising at rear.......................... 128
Sun visors ................................... 125
Symbols ..................................... 5-6
Tailgate
- opening from inside ................. 128
- opening with remote
control .............................. 8-128
Technical specifications .......... 243
Towing the car ............................. 217
Trailer towing............................... 185
Transmission
- specifications .......................... 246
Trip computer .............................. 72
Trip meter reset............................ 51
Tyres
- correct reading ........................ 249
- FIX&GO kit for quick
tyre repairing .......................... 191
- inflating pressure ..................... 248
- snow chains............................ 186
- types of tyres and rims ............. 248
- winter .................................... 185
Use of non-toxic material............. 174
Useful accessories ........................ 187
VDC system .............................. 136
Vehicle data plate ................... 243-244
Vehicle dimensions ....................... 252
Vehicle identification..................... 243
Vehicle inactivity .......................... 186
- using again............................. 187
Vehicle maintenance .............. 221
Volumetric protection .................... 13
Warning lights .......................... 77
Washing the car
- engine compartment ................ 242
- exterior .................................. 241
- interior ................................... 242
Weights ...................................... 253
Wheels
- FIX&GO kit for quick
tyre repairing .......................... 191
- geometry ............................... 251
- snow chains............................ 186
- tyre inflating pressure............... 248
- tyres and rims.................. 249-250
ALP
HABET
ICAL
INDEX
282
Windows
- cleaning ................................. 241
Windscreen/rearscreen/headlamp
washer fluid
- checking level
and topping up........................ 231
Windscreen washer
- checking fluid level and
topping up.............................. 231
- intelligent washing
function.................................. 45
- operation................................ 44
- spray jets ............................... 239
Windscreen wiper
- blade replacement ................... 239
- intelligent washing function....... 45
- operation................................ 44
- rain sensor.............................. 45
- spray jets ............................... 239
Winter
- snow chains............................ 186
- winter tyres ............................ 185
Always ask your mechanic for®
®
The Selenia range,satisfies the most sophisticated international specifications. Highly
advanced and tested technical characteristics allow Selenia to bea lubricant able to guarantee the maximum protection and perfor-
mance of your engine.
SELENIA RACING
Iis a lubricant which is particularly suited for competition use of T urismo vehicles this lubricant is the result of the Selenia racing team's lenghtly experi-ence on some of the most importantinternational circuits. It guarantees maximum protection at high temperatures
SELENIA RACING assicura inoltre:
� maximum use of power output;
� constant pressure within lubrication systemin all kinds of application;
� optimum viscosity at the highest of temperatures.
Can be used in aspirated turbochargedor multivalve petrol engines of any capacity.
For further information on Selenia products visit the web site www.flselenia.com.
The Selenia range includes Selenia 20K, Selenia 20K Alfa Romeo, Selenia Performer 5W-30 e 5W-40,Selenia Turbo Diesel, Selenia WR, Selenia Digitech.
Your car is factory filled with Selenia Racing
NOTES..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SS E R V I C E
AFTER SALESASSISTENZA TECNICA - INGEGNERIA ASSISTENZIALEViale Alfa Romeo 20020 Arese (MI) - ItaliaFiat Auto S.p.A.Publication no. 60431320 - 6th Edition - 01/2005All rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part is prohibited without written permissionfrom Fiat Auto S.p.A.
TYRES INFLATION PRESSURE COLD
ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT
Do not discard used oil in the environment.
REFFUELLING
Only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N. (Specification EN228)
3.2 V6 24V 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
Fuel tank capacity litres 63 63
Reserve litres 7 7
3.2 V6 24V 3.2 V6 24V Selespeed
Oil sump and filter litres 5.90 5.90
(•) Unchainable tyres.(▼) Size certified and admitted only for YOKOHAMA.(*) IMPORTANT Chainable tyres; see paragraph "Snow chains" in section "Correct use of the car".Increase the specified pressure by +0.3 bar if the tyre is warm.With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.
Tyres215/45 ZR17“ 87W (*)
front rear
2.5 2.3
2.8 2.6
Tyres215/45 R17“ 87W (*)
front rear
2.5 2.3
2.8 2.6
Tyres235/35 R18“ 90Y (•) (▼)
front rear
2.5 2.3
2.8 2.6
Tyres225/45 ZR17“ 91Y (•)
front rear
2.5 2.3
2.8 2.6
Reduced loadbar(2 occupants)
Full load bar
